最新消息: USBMI致力于为网友们分享Windows、安卓、IOS等主流手机系统相关的资讯以及评测、同时提供相关教程、应用、软件下载等服务。

ARTISAN技术集团设备购买与售卖说明书

IT圈 admin 32浏览 0评论

2024年9月29日发(作者:羿暄和)

Chapter 5-The Display

Control

Group

DIRECT

BINARY

PROGRAMlVHNG

I

Floating

Point

(LU

The LUAN command loads the active display buffer with 64-bit ANSI floating point values,

which are converted to integers. Here is a sample listing:

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DBSZ100,I"

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DBACI"

OUTPUT @Dsa; "LUAN"

OUTPUT @Dsa USING "#,2A,W";"#A",40

OUTPUT @Dsa; FORMAT OFF

OUTPUT @Dsa; Array(*)

OUTPUT @Dsa; FORMAT ON

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DBUR"

After receiving LUAN, the analyzer expects to receive #A to specify ANSl data followed by the

length word specifying the number of bytes to be output (40 in this example). After receiving

these first four bytes, the analyzer is ready for data, which is in "Array" in this example. (The

ASCII formatter was deactivated for this computer to prevent it from converting ANSl to ASCII.

Your computerllanguage may handle this differently; if it automatically formats output data to

ASCII, you need to disable this feature before sending ANSl data.) Finally, buffer #I is put up

on the display.

uffers

in

Internal

Binary (LUBN)

The LUBN command loads the active display buffer in the

HP

3562A1s internal binary format.

This load command can be used only with data that have been dumped from the analyzer in

(or externally converted to) the internal binary format. Here is a sample listing:

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DBSZ100,I"

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DBACI"

OUTPUT @Dsa; "LUBN"

USING "#,2A,W";"#A",IO OUTPUT @Dsa

OUTPUT @Dsa; FORMAT ON

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DBUW"

After receiving LUBN, the analyzer expects to receive #A to specify binary data followed by the

length word specifying the number of bytes to be output (10 in this example). After receiving

these first four bytes, the analyzer is ready for data, which is in "Array" in this example. (The

ASCII formatter was deactivated for this computer to prevent it from converting binary to ASCII.

Your computerllanguage may handle this differently; if it automatically formats output data to

ASCII, you need to disable this feature before sending binary data,) Finally, buffer #I is put up

on the display.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-The

Display

Control Group

DISPLAY PROGRAMMING

WITH

BASlC 3.0

As explained at the beginning of this chapter, the third method of display programming is

defining the analyzer's display as the plotter for BASlC 3.0 graphics. The use of this technique

is described in BASlC 3.0 Graphics Techniques. The command used to specify the display is:

PLOTTER

IS

720, "HPGL"

,.

where 720 is the analyzer's address

For example, the following BASlC 3.0 statements plot a box and some large text on the display:

PLOTTER

IS

720, "HPGL"

OUTPUT 720; "DBSZ250,l"

OUTPUT 720; "DBAC1"

VIEWPORT 0,88,5,99

WINDOW -730,130,-100,100

FRAME

LORG

5

CSlZE 17

MOVE 0,O

LABEL

"BIG

TEXT"

OUTPUT 720; "DBUPI"

This example also demonstrates the ability of this technique to draw larger textthan is possible

with the HP-GL technique.

Every display buffer in the

HP

3562A, both user buffers and the analyzer's own internal

buffers, can be dumped via HP-IB. The internal buffers hold data traces, marker readouts, etc.

This section shows you how to select the buffer to be dumped, describes the internal display

b~uffe~rs,~and~shows~how~to~dump~tke~selected-buffer~

Dumping buffers takes two steps: first, use the vector block pointer (VBLK) to identify the buffer

to be dumped. Second, select the data format in which you want the data dumped, then send

the appropriate command. Buffers can be dumped in ASCII, ANSI floating point, and the

internal binary formats. (For general information on these formats, please refer to Chapter 3.)

Display buffers contain 1345A binary commands (see "Direct Binary Programming" earlier in

this chapter). When HP-GL or BASlC 3.0 commands are loaded, they are converted to 1345A

cpmmands by the analyzer. Because of this conversion, you can program a display initially

with HP-GL or BASIC 3.0, load it into the analyzer, then dump out the direct binary equivalent.

If

you then store these binary commands, you can have the speed advantage of direct binary

any time in the future that this display is needed.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-The Display

Control

Group

DUMPING

DISPLM BUFFERS

The

Vector

Display

uffea Pointer

(V

The buffer to be dumped is selected with the vector buffer pointer command (VBLK). Its

syntax is:

where n is the buffer number

The number you specify with n depends on whethe; or not user buffers are being used. Table

5-1 shows the value of n to be used for dumping all user and internal display buffers. Note that

to dump user buffers, their numbers are offset by

+

4

from the number used to identify them

for other graphics commands.

Table

5-1

Identifying

Buffer

Pointer Values

Value

of

n

(VBIKn)

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

User buffer

-

-

-

-

0

Internal

buffer

Softkey underlining

Softkey menu

Command echo

Message

Special markers, trace

A

Special markers, trace

B

X

marker readout

Y marker readout

Trace

A

Trace

B

Grid

-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Ya readout

Y

b readout

Xa readout

Xb readout

A

label

If any user buffer has been created, the user buffer corresponding to n is dumped. Otherwise,

the internal buffer corresponding to n is dumped. For example, if you set up a user buffer with

the

DBSZ

command then send VBLKIO, you will get user buffer

6

if you send a dump com-

mand. However, if you had not created a user buffer and you sent VBLKIO, you would get the

internal grid buffer in response to

a

dump command.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

5-The

Display

Control Group

DUMPING

DISPLAY BUFFERS

The display buffer identified with the vector buffer pointer (VBLK) can be dumped in ASCII

format with the DVAS command. There is no header with this transfer, just #I and the length

variable. The following BASIC statements dump the internal buffer that contains the softkey

labels:

OPTION BASE

1

OUTPUT 720; "DVAS"

ENTER 720 USING "2A,K";A$,Length

REDlM Buffer(Length)

ENTER 720 Buffer(*)

This dumps the #I format specifier into A$, the length variable into "Length," and the ASCII

variables into integer array "Buffer."

Dumping

Buffers in ANSI

Floating Point

(DVAN)

The display buffer identified with the vector buffer pointer (VBLK) can be dumped in ANSI

floating point format with the DVAN command. There is no header with this transfer, just #A and

the length word indicating the number of bytes to be transferred. The following BASIC state-

ments dump the internal buffer that contains the softkey labels:

OPTION BASE

1

ASSIGN @Dsa

to

720

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DVAN"

ENTER @Dsa USING "%,2A,W";A$,Length

REDlM Buffer (Length DIV 8)

ASSIGN

@;

Dsa FORMAT OFF

ENTER @Dsa Buffer(*)

This dumps the #A format specifier into A$, the length word into "Length," then redimensions

the array to Length18 (&byte floating point values).

The display buffer identified with the vector buffer pointer (VBLK) can be dumped in the

analyzer's internal binary format with the DVBN command. There is no header with this trans-

fer, just #A and the length word indicating the numberof bytes to be transferred. The following

BASIC statements dump the internal buffer that contains the softkey labels:

OPTION BASE

1

ASSIGN @Dsa to 720

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DVBN"

ENTER @Dsa USING "%,2A,W";A$,Length

REDlM Buffer (Length DIV 8)

ASSIGN @Dsa; FORMAT OFF

ENTER @Dsa Buffer(*)

This dumps the #A format specifier into A$, the length word into "Length," then redimensions

the array to Length12 (2-byte values).

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

11345A

COMMANDS.

NOTE:

Bit Dl 5 is used only for vector memory board

5 commands. For standard 1345A commands,

Dl

should be

0.

Pr~gramming Command Ranges.

I

PROGRAMMING COMMAND RANGES OF THE 1345A

,134SA Command

a Plol

X

Y lbeam 0111

Y lbeam on1

b Graph

Set Della-X

Y t

beam olf

Y rbem on1

c Text

d Set Condltlon

Oclat Range

00000-07777

10000-13777

14000-17777

20000.27777

30000-33777

34000-37777

40000-57777

60000-77777

Hexadeclmal Range

13458% 16

Bit

Data

Word.

MSB

Dl4 D131~12 Dl1 Dl0 D9

LSB

Dl DB

P

D8 D7 D6. D5 D4 03 02

COMMAND^

COMMAND MODIFIERS

1345A COMMANDS

Set Condllion

Plol Command

Graph Command

Text Command

Graph Command.

Graph

Command:

MSB

Dl4 Dl3 012

0 1 XY

Set

Condition Command.

Set Condlllon Command:

~lll

Dl0

PC

1

Dta

I*

!

i

D9

Ds

D8 D7

DB DI

DATA

D6

136

D5

D5

04

DI

LSB

D3 D2 Dl D0

Dl D2 D? DB

-

I

MSB

Dl4 D131D12 Dl1 Dl0 DY

I 1/1r

IU

D8 D7

LI LB

D6

0

D5 D4

WI

D3

WO

D2

LSB

Dl DB

Command Modlfters:

a XY lnlormat~on ID121

0 = Set Delta-X increment, spec~lied by DB-DIB lor all subsequent Y coordinales

1 = Set Y coordinate, specilled by Da-Dl8 The beam

IS

to be moved to thls

Y

In conlunctlori with the Delta X increment

I

I

b

PC Beam Control Inlormallon ID1

x x x x x x

Note: Bit 6 ID61 must be

Command Modlllers:

a To Set Line Intensdy:

It

-

0

0

1

1

b. To Set Line Type:

Ll

-

0

0

1

1

c To Sel Wrltmg Speed

Type

Solid Line

lntensilied End Poinls on Solid Line

Long Dashes

Short Dashes

Intensity

Blank

Dim

Hall Brighlness

Full Brightness

0 = Beam OFF (move,

1

=

Beam ON ldrawl

MEMORY

BOARD COMMANDS.

Vector Memory Word.

--

I

1

0

0

Speed

005 In per ps

OlOmperps

0 15 In per ps

020 In per ps

1

0

I

0

internal dump.

An internal jump does no1 affect the Vector Memory address pointer.

Plot Command.

Plot Command:

MSB

1

Dl4 Dl3 Dl2 DlllD10 09 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2

LSB

Dl D0

MIS MI4 MI3 MI2 Mil MI0 M9

M8

1

M7

A7

M6

A6

M5 M4

M3 M2

A4

A3

Mi M0

Aih

0

X X AII Ale

A3

AB

A5

A2

X

=

DON'T CARE

M15 = 1, MI 4 = 0: lnlernal jump to Vector Memory address specilied by All thru

As

during

relresh.

-. .

Command Modlllers:

a. XY Intormation (Dl21

0 = X coordinate (0-2847). specified by Do-DIE

1

= Y coordinate (0.2047). specified by DB-DIB

b

PC Beam Control Information (Dl 1)

0 = Beam OFF (move1

1

=

Bcam ON (drawl

XXX

Address Pointer.

X = DON'T CARE

As

=

0: Set poinlei regisler to the Vector Memory address value specified by All lhru AB.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

5-Display

Control Group

1345A

Modified ASCII

Character Set.

1345A MODIFIED ASCll CODE CONVFRStON TARLE

MOST SIGNIFICANT CHARACTER

1 234

5

centered

'

SP

cenlered o !

0

1

2

3

4

5

8

9

.

Capabilities for Character

and Vector

Combinations.

0

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

6

'

7

P

q

l

s

t

u

V

w

x

Y

Z

i

:

@

HP logo

P

LEAST

SIGNIFICANT

CHARACTER

upper-hall tc

lower-hall Itc

lefl-half

IIC

rtghl-half ltc

back space

112 shlfl down

llne leed

lnv lhne leed

112

shill

up

carrlage relurn

hor~zontal Itc

verl~cal Itc

EXAMPLES

HP logo

A

I

-

I

7r

I

7

a

A

u

$

%

1

1

t

;

A

B

c

D

E

H

1

J

(degreet

II

P-

.

.

K

P

O

R

s

T

U

V

w

X

Y

Z

I

a

b

c

d

e

l

9

h

I

Average character drawing lime. 16 -sec

Recommended relresh rate: 60 Hz

-

16.6 msec

1345A writing speed: 0.1 in./-sec

Veclor dead lime: 1 -sec

NUMBER OF CHARACTERS TO BE DRAWN

0

Tolal frame time (msec)

Characler writing time

(msec)

Ttme len lo draw vectors

(

msec)

100

16.67

200

16.67

300

16.67

16.67

I

k

I

.

0

A

/

=

>

?

L

M

N

O

Im

"n

-

O

q

O

t

AVERAGE VECTOR

LENGTH

0.1 in.

0.5 in

2 0 in.

=

r

t

l~ne leed

=

=

=

=

=

01

41

69

16

7F

09

wi

N

APPROXIMATE NUMBER OF VECTORS DRAWN

6.0 in.

I

Text Command.

Text Command:

MSB

Dl4 013 D12 Dl1 Dl0 D9

1 0 SI S0 Ri Ro

D8

I

I

Vector Drawing

Time

Calculations.

VECTOR DRAWING TIME =

WRITING SPEED VECTOR

IENGTH

+

*

I

PICTURE DRAWING TIME =

1

LENGTH

+

-h%

WRITING SPEED VECTOR

15ps

CHARACTER

D7

C7

D6

C6

D5

C5

04 03 D2 Dl

CI

LSB

DB

N =TOTAL NUMBER OF VECTORS

M = TOTAL NUMBER OF CHARACTERS

ES

O

C3 C2

CB

i-

I

CHARACTER

Command Modlliers:

For Co-C?. see modifled ASCll conversion lable

a ES Establtsh

Size

of Characler

0 = Use previous stze and rolal~on

1

= Eslablish new size and rolallon accordmg to SI.

SB.

RI and Ro

b Rolale Characler CCW

Vector Length

vs.

Writing

Speed for

60

Ha:

Refresh Rate.

I

Rotalion

0

degrees

Sodegrees

180 degrees

270 degrees

I

1

PROGRAMMABLE CHARACTER S1ZE5:

1.0

X

56 characlers per line. 29 horizontal lines possible.

1.5

X

37 characters per line. 19 horizonlal lines possible.

horizontal lines possible 2.0

X

28 characters per line. I4

2.5

X

22 characters per line. 1

I

horizonlal lines possible.

I

COHDITIOHSa

REFRESH.16.67mSEC

'

2'

VECTOR LENGTH

3'

Character Rotation.

I

SP=CHARaCTER STARTING POINT

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

5-Display

Control Group

This section of the DESIGNERS MANUAL will describe the programmable functions of the 1345A

Digital Display Module. Proper understanding of the capabilities and limitations of the 1345A will

enable the user to obtain optimum performance. This section of the manual will be divided into three

parts. These three parts will address the areas of 1345A Programming Commands, 1345A Display

Requirements, and Performance Optimization. It is recommended that the user read through Section

4, Interfacing the 1345A, prior to reading this section. Please read the complete text once to gain a firm

foundation of the total 1345A operating environment.

The 1345A Digital Display has 4 commands. These are PLOT, GRAPH, SETCONDITION, and TEXT.

These four commands provide complete programmable vector and text generation with a minimum of

command overhead. Most vector and text operations can be handled with only one 16 bit command

word.

The 1345A receives 16 bit data words over the 26 pin interface connector. These 16 bit data words

are decoded by the 1345A into one of four distinct commands. Each 16 bit data word sent to the

1345A can be separated into two distict data fields. The 1345A 16 bit data word is shown in figure 5-1.

Each of the commands that the 1345A can recognize is selected by the state of data bits Dl4 and

Dl 3. Data bit Dl 5 is used onlyfor memory board operations and is discussed 1345A without

memory uses only data bits DO-Dl 4. The lower 13 data bits DO-Dl2 are used as command modifiers.

I

1345A COMMANDS

Bii4

Set Condition

Plot Command

Graph Command

Text Command

Bi[3,

I

Figure

5-1. 1345A

16

Bit Data

Word

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

These modifiers allow each command to have several selectable attributes. Vector drawing

operations are directly dependent on the status of these data bits in every 1345A command. Each of

these commands and their modifiers will be dicussed using programming examples. The 16 bit data

for the examples will be in HEXADECIMAL or HEX format. This format is easier to follow than 16 bit

binary data words'. Each HEX data word sent to the 1345A will be equivalent to a 16 bit binary word.

HEX

Format

Generation. Each 16 bit data word can be separated into four, four bit binary numbers.

This allows each four *bit binary number to have sixteen distinct combinations. Each of these

combinations is assigned a HEX equivalence, fhe conversion from binary to HEX is contained in

figure 5-2.

Each data word in the following command examples will use this HEX format. These HEX

representations will correspond to the required bit patterns recognized by the 1345A.

Binary Code

b4 b3 b2 br

Figure

5-2.

Binary

to

HEX

Conversion

G

EXAMPLES.

Vector Plotting.

An explanation of vector drawing will help clarify the process. In figure 5-3, there are three vectors

defined by four endpoints. Each vector requires two endpoints. The vector from point

1

to point 2

requires two endpoint declarations. The vector from point

2

to point 3 requires only point 3 be declared

as an endpoint, because point 2 is already established. The vector drawn from point

2

to point 3 is a

vector with the beam off. This allows the beam to be moved to new vector starting points without

with the beam on. The

affecting existing displayed vectors. The vector from point 3 to point

4

isdrawn

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

.-

-

Figure 5-3. Vector Plotting

correct sequence for constructing vectors in PLOT mode is ALWAYS Xfirst, Y next, X, Y,

X,

.

. .

,

Y,

until

the vector sequence is comp1ete.A vector is plotted according to the last SET CONDITION command

sent to the 1345A.

The "BEAM

ON"

bit in the PLOT command is ignored if the coordinate being specified is an X value.

The beam status only has effect

if the

Y

coordinate is being entered. The CRT beam will move to the

location specified by the last X and

Y

coordinate values specified in the PLOT commands.

Graph

Plotting.

An example of the graph command is contained in figure 5-4. In this example

15

vectors are drawn

with only

20

commands. The sequence is described below.

Step

1

-

Set Condition to define line type

Plot command to set

X

location at lower left corner of graph

Step

2

-

Step

3

-

Plot command to set

Y

location at lower left corner of graph.

Step

5

-

Graph command with beam off and Y value set to

0.

This will not plot anything, but is

used to initiate the

'X

increment to point

1.

Step

6

-

Graph command with beam on and

Y

value set to point

1.

Step 7

-

Graph command with beam on and

Y

value set to point

2.

(send only Y values of points

3

through 14)

Step

20

-

Graph command with beam on and Y value set to point

15

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

5-Display

Control Group

Normal X,Y plot mode would require 33 commands to construct the same graph. Note thatthe above

ce does not include generation of the graph axis, only construction of the graph

itself.

The construction of a graph can have two forms. The vectors may start at either the origin or

somewhere along the Y axis of the graph. If the origin is the starting point, then the user needs to set

the first Y value to zero. This will not plot anything but will start the graph at the origin and increment the

X

value by one. When the next

Y

value is sent, a vector will be drawn from the origin to the new

Y

value.

If the Y axis is the starting point then the user needs to send the first

Y

value with the beam will

insure that the axis of the graph is not altered by the line type set for the graph trace. For the next

Y

value the beam should be turned on.

Figure

5-4.

Graph Mode Example

Set

Condition Command.

When

Dl

4 and

Dl

3 are both in the High TTL state, the 1345A will interpret the data word as a SET

CONDITION

command. This command is used to set vector attributes. The attributes affected are

By

combining line intensity and writing speed parameters, up to twelve levels of discernible intensities

can be generated. Figure

5-6

contains several example combinations. This allows the user to create

displays with background graticules and intensify important trace data. The beam will be brightest

with the intensity set at full bright at the slowest writing speed. The beam will be dimmest with the

intensity set at dim at the fastest writing speed. The SET CONDITION command may be executed at

any time and the vector attributes will remain in another SET CONDITION command is

executed. Data bit

6

in this command is defined to be TTL low. This MUST occur when the Set

Condition command is executed or the display may respond in an undefined fashion.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

5-Display

Control Group

Set

Condition

Command:

I

MSB

I

Dl4 D131D12 Dl1 Dl0

D9

D8 D7

D6

D5 D4 D3 D2

LSB

Dl D0

Note: Bit

6

(D6) must be zero.

Command

Modifiers:

a. To Set Line Intensity:

Intensity

Blank

Dim

Half Brightness

Full Brightness

b.

TO'S^^

Line Type:

L1

L0

TY pe

Solid Line

Intensified End Points on Solid Line

Long Dashes

Short Dashes

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

c.

To Set Writing Speed:

WI

1

1

W0

Speed

0.05 in. per ps

0.1 0 in, per ps

1

0

Figure

5-5.

Set Condition Command

6998h

Dim, Short Dash,.Speed 0.05

Bright, Solid, Speed 0.2

Half Bright, Solid, Speed 0.2

Half Bright, Long Dash, Speed 0.2

7800h

7000h

7100h

Figure

5-6.

Set

Condition Examples In Hex

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

Plot

Command.

When the two most significant bits of the data word

,Dl

4 and Dl 3 are

in

a low TTL state, the 1345A will

recognize the data word to be a PLOT command. Figure

5-7 contains the correct bit pattern for this

command.

Plot

Command:

MSB

Dl4 Dl3 Dl2

DII

0 0 XY

1

I

I

Dl0

09

D8

D8

07 D6

D7

DATA

D6

D5

D5

D4

D4

D3

D3

D2

D2

LS B

Dl D0

Dl DB

B-

PCIDle

D9

14

Command Modifiers:

a. XY lnformation (D12)

0

=

X

coordinate (0-2047), specified by DB-DIB

1

=

Y coordinate (0-2047), specified by DB-DIB

b. PC Beam Control lnformation (Dl

1

)

0

=

Beam OFF (move)

1

=

Beam ON (draw)

Figure

5-7.

Plot Command Bit Pattern

This command moves the beam to a specific X-Y location in the defined cartesian coordinate plane

each time an X-Y coordinate pair is received. The values of the X and Y coordinates range from 0 to

2047. The origin of the cartesian plane is located in the lower left corner and has an X-Y value of (0,O).

This command also turns the beam on or off for each vector. The beam may be moved in either mode.

.

-

.

- -

-

-4o;

-

;t-j@&+@&$&&+t

. .

--

&&+&&/

-

-

@

X,Y coordinate values in the PLOT commands. The vector is drawn in accordance with the last SET

CONDITION command received by the 1345A.

The diagram in figure 5-8 is a single vector defined by its endpoints in the vector drawing area. To

draw this line the 1345A would need to receive two sets of

X

and Y coordinates. The 1345A receives

the coordinates in the specified order XI ,Y1 ,X2,Y2. The beam is moved only when the Y coordinate is

received. The status of the beam is only affected by the beam status bit in the Y coordinate command.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display

Control

Group

Figure

5-8.

Vector Defined

By

Endpoints

An example of vector plotting is contained in figure 5-9. This example contains vectors drawn with the

beam on and with the beam off. The steps to draw these figures are given in the required sequence

with equivalent HEX code for the 16 bit data words.

BOX

1

BOX

2

BEAH

NQVEHEWT

BEAM

PIDVEHENT

,

B

EAPl

tl

I

I

Drawing a Square

BEAM

OFF

I

1-C

I

Drawing Two Horizontal Lines

Figure

5-9.

Plot Vector Example

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

5-Display

Control

Group

To draw the figures, send the following

16

bit data words in sequence to the

1345A.

Command

Step

1.

Set Condition

2.

Plot

XI

3.

Plot

Y1

(beam off)

ox

'I

data

781 8h

0200h

1200h

1 FOOh

8FOOh

1 FOOh

1 AOOh

0200h

1 AOOh

Box

2

data

781 8h

0200h

1200h

13454

Sets Vector type

(Solid Full Bright,

.05)

XI =512

move to

Y1=512

move to

Y2=1792

X3=1792

4. PLot

Y2

(beam on)

5.

Plot

X3

6.

Plot

Y3

(beam on)

(beam off)

1 700h

8FOOh

1 FOOh

move to

Y3=1792

move to

Y 4=512

X1 =512

7.

Plot

Y4

(beam on)

8.

Plot

X1

9.

Plot

Yl

(beam on)

(beam off)

1 200h

0200h

1

AOO~

move to

Y1=512

A

description of these two examples will help the user understand the vector plotting process. Step

1

defines the vector attributes for the vectors to be plotted by the

1345A.

Definition of a starting point is

crucial when plotting vectors. Steps

2

and

3

initialize the starting point of the box. Next a new

Y

value is

received indicating that the beam be turned on. Since the

X

value didn't change, only a new

Y

value

need be sent. The beam will move to the location specified by the

X-Y

location when the

Y

value is

received. The vector is drawn according to the status of the last SET CONDITION command.

When a new horizontal location is required, both the

X

and

Y

coordinates need to be sent to the

1 345A.

The beam is only moved and the vector drawn when a

Y

coordinate is received. The

Y

value doesn't

change going from step

4

to step

5,

but the

X

value requires that a new

X-Y

coordinate pair

be sent to the

1345A

as in steps

5

and

6.

In step

7,

the

X

value doesn't require a change so onlya new

Y

value is sent in step 7. The beam is turned on to draw the vector. In steps

8

and

9

a new

X-Y

pair is

required so both values must be sent. To draw box

2,

only steps

5

and 7 need to be changed. The

beam status bit tells the 1345sdrawn,but

with the beam tuped off.

The user should notice that when a vector is to be drawn vertically, only a

Y

value is sent for the

second vector endpoint. The

1345A

has a "last

X"

register that stores the value of the last

X

location.

This feature allows vertical vectors with the same

X

values to be drawn with one less endpoint

requirement.

When plotting vectors in the vector drawing area, the user should take into account the difference in

CRT screen height and width. The

1345A

vector. drawing area is

9.5

cm high by

12.5

cm wide and has

2048

addressable points in either direction.

If

this difference is not taken into account, boxes will

appear as rectangles. To plot vectors correctly, the user may need to apply a scaling factor to vector

endpoint calculations. The scaling factors for the

1345A

are approximately

215.58

addressable

direction and

163.84

addressable pointslcm in the

X

direction. These figures are points1 cm in the

Y

used when calculating the actual length of vectors in cm.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display

Control

Group

Graph

Command.

The GRAPH command is very similar to the PLOT command. The purpose of the GRAPH command is

and

to allow plotting of vectors that have equal incremental

X

coordinates. When data word bits Dl4

Dl 3 are TTL low and TTL high respectively the 1345A will interpret the data word to be a GRAPH

command as shown in figure 5-1 0. In the GRAPH mode, the 1345A will automatically increment the X

coordinate after each Y-coordinate is received. This allows single valued functions to be plotted in

graph form with fewer endpoints than would be possible using

X,Y

coordinates for each data point.

I

I

I

I

Graph

Command:

MSB

i

Dl4 Dl3 Dl2 Dl1

1

Dl0 D9

0

D8

D8

D7

07

D6

D6

D5 D4

D4

D3

03

D2

D2

LSB

Dl DB

DI DB

B-

1

XY PC) D10

I

I

Ds

D5

!

"

Command

Modifiers:

a. XY Information (012)

DATA

0

=

Set Delta-X increment, specified by DB-Din for all subsequent Y coordinates

1

=

Set Y coordinate, specified by 00-010. The beam is to be moved to this Y

in conjunction with the Delta X increment.

b. PC Beam Control lnformation (Dl 1

)

0

=

Beam OFF (move)

1

=

Beam ON (draw)

Figure

5-10.

Bit Definition For Graph Command

There are three command modifiers in the GRAPH command. These modifiers control the X

2

is 0, the data in bits DO-Dl 0

increment, Y coordinate data value, and the beam status. When Dl

define the value of the X increment. This is the amount the X coordinate will increase after each Y

coordinate is plotted. The range of the X increment is 0 to 2047. It should be noted that X increases

relative to present X,Y coordinate values on the screen. Figure 5-1 1 contains an example of the graph

mode commands. The beam moves when the

Y

coordinate value is receiv

I

Figure

5-1

1.

Graph Mode Example

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

To create the output in figure 5-1 0 the following steps were executed with the given 16 bit HEX data.

Command

Step

1. Set Condition

2. Plot XI

3. Plot YI (beam off)

4. Graph command Set Delta X

5. Graph command Y1

6. Graph command Y2

7. Graph command Y3

8. Graph command Y4

16

Bit

Data

1345A

781 8h

0200h

1200h

2040h

328011

3280h

3300h.

3280h

Set Vector Attributes

(Solid Full Bright, .05)

X=512

move to Y=512

set X increment to 64

Y=640

Y=640

Y=768

Y=640

Step 1 defines the line type, speed, and intensity. Steps 2 and 3 determine the starting point of the

Y

values are sent in steps 5-8. The value

graph. The delta X increment is established in step (4)

of X is incremented AFTER each Y value is received.

If the graph is to start at the axis origin, then execute a graph command with afirst Y value set to zero.

This will not plot anything, but will increment the X value by delta X. The next vector will be drawn from

the origin to the Y value for the first X increment.

If

the graph is to start at the Y axis, then execute a Y

value command. The next vector will be drawn from the Y value on the Y axis to the Y value of the first

X increment.

Text.

The 1345A comes complete with an internal character generator. This internal character data is a

modified ASCII character set for graphics use. The data for commanding the 1345A to enter the text

mode is in figure

5-1

2. Data bits Dl 4 must be TTL high and Dl 3 must be TTL low. When this command

is executed the 1345A will interpret the lower eight data bits, DO-D7 as an equivalence for an ASCII or

pecial character. Each vector of the character is drawn on the CRT screen according to the vector

cnaracterlstlcs ot the last

S

sarealways drawn at the

slowest writing speed. The he type has no visible effect except on the largest character size, (2.5X).

The position is defined by the last X and Y coordinates received by the 1345A.

When generating characters, the 1345A automatically provides character spacing to the right of each

TEXT command has command modifiers for size and rotation information. New size

and rotation information is controlled by the status of data word bit D8. To initiate new character

attributes, bit 08 must be set high as a new information indicator.

If

this data bit is "Ow, the size and

rotation bits are ignored.

The 1345A has 4 character sizes. These 4 sizes are defined by the status of bits Dl 1 and Dl 2. The

amount of space needed to draw the characters is contained in figure 5-1 2. This is the required space

needed out of 2048 X 2048 possible points. The number of characters that can be drawn across the

screen at the different sizes is in figure 5-1 3. An example of 1 x character spacing is contained in figure

5-1 4.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

Text

Command:

Command

Modifiers:

For CB-C7, see figure 5-1 4

a. ES Establish Size of Character

0

=

Use previous size and rotation

1

=

Establish new size and rotation according to SI

,

S0,

RI

and RB

b. Rotate Character CCW

Rotation

0 degrees

90 degrees

1 80 degrees

270 degrees

c. Character Size

4

PROGRAMMABLE CHARACTER SIZES:

1

.O X

56

characters per line, 29 horizontal lines possible.

1.5

X

37

characters per line, 19 horizontal lines possible.

2.0

X

28 characters per line, 14 horizontal lines possible.

2.5

X

22 characters per line, 11 horizontal lines possible.

Figure

5-13. 1345A Character Display Capabilities

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

5-Display

Control Group

Figure

5-14.

Example

of 1x

Character Spacing

The starting position of each character is the lower left corner of the defined character cell. After

drawing a character, the 1345A advances to the starting point of the next character much like a

typewriter would operate. The 1345A also contains many special characters that facilitate graphics

and display annotation. Figure 5-15 contains the modified 1345A ASCII character set in

HEX

format.

This

HEX

code is sent to the 1345A

in

the lower

8

bits of each text command.

1345A MODIFIED

ASCII

CODE CONVERSION TABLE

MOST SIGNIFICANT CHARACTER

0

I

5

P

1

2

SP

!

"

#

$

%

&

'

(

)

*

3

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

LI+-I.-

4

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

6

'

7

p

q

r

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

(

)

O

5-

LEAST

SIGNIFICANT

CHARACTER

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

HP

logo

L?

upper-half tic

lower-half tic

left-half tic

right-half tic

back space

1 I2 shift down

line feed

inv. line feed

112 shift

UD

carriage return

horizontal tic

vertical tic

EXAMPLES:

HP logo

A

centered

*

centered o

t

-

1

7~

d-

A

+

"

(degree)

R

f9

P

+

,

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

]

A

-

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

m

n

o

r

h

0

.

/

=

>

?

M

N

O

I

=

=

=

d-

5-

I

=

=

=

line feed

01

41

69

16

7F

09

Figure 5-75. 1345~ Modified ASCII Character Set

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

I

CHARACTER CELL

I

SP

=

CHARACTER STARTING

POINT

Figure 5-16. Character Rotation

Character rotation is an additional feature of the 1345A. The 1345A can be programmed to rotate any

character at 0,90,180, or 270 degrees rotation measured counter clockwise from horizontal. This can

be done for any character at starting point of the character is always the lower left corner

relative to any rotation. For character rotation, the entire character area is rotated the specified

number of degrees and the starting point moves around in a counter clockwise fashion. For example

the starting point of a character rotated 180 degrees would be the upper right corner. This technique is

illustrated in figure 5-16.

Since the starting point of the character changes with rotation, so does the direction of character

spacing. If the rotation is 180 degrees, the characters will be written upside down from right to left. If

the rotation mode is 270 degrees, the characters will advance from too to bottom. Rotation spacing

examples are contained in figure 5-17.

DIRECTOR

OF

CHARACTER SPACING

Figure

5-1

7.

Character Rotation Spacing

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

Character generation on the 1345A has several capabilities that the user need be aware of. Certain

characters that the 1345A is capable of drawing CANNOT be written within a certain distances of

certain CRT screen boundaries. These characters are listed in Figure 5-18. The characters are

referenced to the to the screen boundary at which the limitation occurs.

It is important to observe the recommended character boundary specifications, to avoid problems

which might be encountered by writing at the screen edges. Figure 5-19 contains recommended

limits for each character size at each screen edge. Failure to observe these limits may result in

undefined results particularly when writing characters listed in figure 5-1 8. The user should plot all

characters within these specified borders.

The user should not attempt to write any character along a screen edge. The character spacing

guidelines in figure 5-19 allow ample spacing for characters of all specified sizes. Characters NOT

specified in figure 5-18 may be written closer to the screen borders but it is not recommended.

BOUNDARY CHARACTERS

Left Boundary:

07 "right-half tic"; 08 "back space"; 0E "horizontal tic"; 0F "vertical tic";

10 "centered

*";

11 "centered ow; 41 "A"; 57 "W"; 5F

"-";

77 "w"

05 "lower-half tic"; 09 "1 12 shift down"; OA "line feed"; 0F "vertical Bottom Boundary: 02

"Po;

1C 24

"$";

28

"(";

tic"; 10 "centered

*";

11 "centered

0";

19

29

")";

2C

",";

38 "."; 51

"Q";

58

"[";

5D

"1";

5F 67 t8g"; 6A

Uj";

70 Up";

71 Uq"; 79 Uy"; 7B

"{";

7D

"1"

Top Boundary:

Right Boundary:

1 A

"O

(degree)";

01 "HP logo"; 08 "inv. line feed"; 0C "1 12 shift up"; 16

"J-";

24 "$". 28

"(";

29 38 "8"; 5B 5D

"1";

7B

7D

"1";

7E

U)"; UO"

01 "HP logo"; 16

7E

"0"

"PI;

41 "A"; 51

"Q";

57 "W"; 61 "a"; 71 "q"; 77 "w";

NOTE: HEX character equivalents appear in quotation marks.

Figure

5-1

8.

Boundary Characters

Wrap Around.

The user needs to be aware of a phenomenon called "wrap around". If one or more

vectors are drawn outside the vector drawing area, the display will draw vectors on opposite sides of

the CRT. One part of the vector will be at one side of the screen while the other part of the vector will be

drawn on the opposite side of the CRT. The picture will appear distorted with visible vectors

connecting ends of the vectors This can be corrected by plotting inside the 1345A vector drawing

area.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

BOUNDARY FOR 2.5X

BOUNDARY FOR ZX

18

Figure

5-1

9.

Character Borders

bit commands and refreshes the CRT thus relieving the

The 1345A Memory Option stores up to

4k,

16

user processor of data storage and CRT refresh requirements. The vector memory will appear to the

user processor as a single memory location. The memory option recognizes two commands for

programming. These commands are for data transfer and memory address pointer manipulation. A

data transfer is either a read from or a write to the vector memory. Address pointer operations are used

for positioning the data in the vector memory list and selecting a desired memory read address.

The vector memory contains a 4k by 16 bit memory, a 60 hz refresh timer, and two address pointersfor

-- ~I?p-mwu~~~&~~+y&+&

-

.-

=

h

,

,&T&Ls

ap

t~mer, when enabled will display the contents of the vector memory approximately once every 16.67

ms. There is a jumper on the memory board that allows the user to initiate the refresh cycle from an

external source. This would be used to synchronize the refresh cycle with the user instrument data

transfers or to refresh the display at a frequency other than 60

hz.

There are two pointers used to control access of data to and from the vector memory. One of these

pointers is called the refresh pointer. It is enabled at the start of a refresh cycle and starts sequencing

through vector memory until the end of memory is reached or an internal jump to4095 is encountered.

This is an internal memory address pointer that the user cannot access. The other pointer is called the

Vector Memory Address pointer. This pointer is used to control data access to the vector memory.

This pointer may be positioned by user commands for data transfer into and out of the vector memory

list. In either case, an important fact is, that after a read or write operation the address of this pointer

will increment by one.

pr-

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6

The purpose of this chapter is to explain the bus-only control and communication group of

commands. The topics covered here are:

Service Requests

& Instrument

Status

The status byte

The instrument status register

The activity status register

Labeling user SRQs

Power-on SRQ

Reading sweep points

Ready status

Source fault status

Reference locked status

Measurement done status

Missed sample status

Overflow status

Identify query

Revision query

Serial number query

Setup state transfer

HP-IB trigger enable

Passing control

Error code query

Reading Marker

Values

X

marker

Individual special markers

Grouped special markers

Front Panel

Reading Markers knob movement

Writing to the message field

Controlling display updating

Reading auto carrier values

Controlling HP logo for plotting

Most of the topics in this chapter are also discussed in condensed format in Appendix

B,

"Quick Reference Guide."

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-Cornrnand/Cornmunication

Group

SERVICE REQUESTS AND INSTRUMENT STATUS

The service request (SRQ) is sent by the HP 3562A to gain the attention of the system control-

ler. The SRQ is generated by conditions in the status byte (see the next section). When the

HP

3562A issues an SRQ (activates the SRQ line), it also sets bit

#6

in the status byte. This is

the Require Service (RQS) bit, sometimes referred to asthe "status bit" in connection with a

poll.

An SRQ is sent for two general reasons: either the analyzer needs control of the bus, or there is

some change in its internal status that the controller may be interested in.

The

HP

3562A generates SRQs at three levels. First, true conditions in the status byte directly

send the SRQ. Second, true conditions in the instrument status register (IS) indirectly generate

SRQs through the status byte. Third, conditions in the activity status (AS) register indirectly

generate SRQs through the IS then through the status byte.

Your controller's program doesn't necessarily have to be interrupt-driven. Any status condition

read directly. Table 6-1 summarizes the or event capable of sending an

SRQ

can also be

available status checks and how you can read them with a controller. The "Command" col-

umn shows the checks that have dedicated HP-IB commands.

. .

Programming

for

Service

Requests

In many applications, the controller program will be written so that it stops execution and polls

all instruments on the bus when it receives an SRQ. A program written to perform serial polls

dumps an entire status byte from each instrument and checks the status bit to detect which

instrument requires service. When the instrument requesting service is identified, the reason for

the SRQ can be found by decoding the status byte. Any unmasked status bits and conditions

can initiate an SRQ. RESET and DEVICE CLEAR reset all masks in the status byte, instrument

status and activity status registers.

As mentioned earlier, your program does not have to be interrupt-driven: every conditionlevent

listed in table

6-1

can be read without waiting for an SRQ. The scheme you should take, waiting

-@~ntwp&m&gsW~epm~~6~pI~.

--

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERYiCE REQUESTS

AND INSTRUMENT

STATUS

Table

6-1

Summary

of

Status Checks

in

the

HP

3562A

Status

Byte

Wherelhew

to

read

it

IS

ConditionlEvent

Requested service

Error generated

Ready for HP-IB

commands

User SRQs

End of disc action

End of plot action

Power up

Key pressed

Various plotter

&

disc requests

Instrument status

change

Measurement pause

Auto sequence pause

End of measurement,

capture or throughput

Sweep point ready

Channel 1 over range

Channel

2

over range

Channel 1 half scale

Channel

2

half scale

Source fault

Reference locked

Marker knob turned

Entry knob turned

Activity status change

System failure

Filling time record

Filters settling

Curve fit in progress

Missed external sample

Timed preview active

Data accepted

Waiting for trigger

Waiting for arm

Ramping source

Diagnostic in progress

Marker calc in progress

Identify

Revision

Send setup state

as

Command

ERR?

RDY?

KEY?

*

*

IS?

SMSD

SSWP

SOVl

SOV2

SFLT

RLOK

AS?

SMSP

*

*

*

*

*

ID?

REV?

SET?

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT

STATUS

The status byte is an &bit byte that provides information about the analyzer's current inter-

action with the bus. It provides 35 conditions, each with a unique code. All conditions are

capable of generating SRQs. Some of the conditions can be masked, which prevents them

from sending an SRQ, regardless of their current state. For example, if the "key pressed"

condition is enabled (unmasked) and a key is pressed on the front panel, reading the status

byte indicates that it was indeed the key pressed condition that generated the SRQ.

Table 6-2 shows the eight bits in the

HP

3562A's status byte. The status byte is read by serial

polling the analyzer (which also clears the status byte). Five of these bits are encoded; refer to

table 6-3 for the condition codes.

Table

6-2

The

HP

35628's

Status Byte

Bit

7

Value

128

Description

see table 6-3

RQS

(HP 3562A requested

service)

5

32

ERR

(HP-IB error)

RDY

(ready to accept HP-IB

commands)

3

2

1

0

8

4

see table 6-3

see table 6-3

see table 6-3

see table 6-3

2

1

occurs when the command buffer is empty. The

HP-IB

command buffer has a capacity of

three 80-byte command lines where a byte represents one character, and a line is defined

to be terminated by a line-feed or activation of the EOI (End Or Identify) bus management

line (carriage returns are ignored).

ERR (bit 5) is set when the instrument encounters an error condition and is cleared when the

error register is read by the controller with the ERR? query command. Refer to "Error Codes"

later in this section to decode the number returned with ERR?.

RQS (bit 6) is set when the analyzer activates the SRQ bus management line and is cleared

when the controller serial polls the

HP

3562A for its status byte.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT STATUS

Table

6-3

shows the condition codes represented by bits

7,3,2,1

and

0

in

the status byte.

Table

6-3

Status Byte Condition Codes

Status bit

Numbers

73210

Status

Byte

Value

Description

No service requested

User SRQ

#I

User SRQ

#2

User SRQ

#3

User SRQ #4

User SRQ

#5

User SRQ

#6

User SRQ

#7

User SRQ

#8

End of disc action

End of plot action

Instrument status change

Power up

Key pressed

Device Clear Plotter, Listen HP

3562A

Unaddress Bus, Listen HP

3562A

Talk plotter, Listen HP

3562A

Talk disc execution. Listen HP

3562A

Talk disc report, Listen HP

3562A

Talk Amigo disc command, Listen HP

3562A

Talk Amigo disc data, Listen HP

3562A

Talk Amigo short status, Listen HP

3562A

Talk disc identify, Listen

HP

3562A

Talk Amigo parallel poll, Listen HP

3562A

Listen Plotter. Talk HP

3562A

Listen disc command, Talk HP

3562A

Listen disc execution, Talk HP

3562A

- - --

--an&&&-

Listen

mig go

disc data, Talk

HP

3562A

Listen Amigo disc read, Talk HP

3562A

Listen Amigo disc write, Talk HP

3562A

Listen Amigo disc format, Talk HP

3562A

00000

00001

0001 0

0001 1

00100

001 01

001 10

001 11

01000

01001

01010

0101 1

01 100

01101

01110

01111

10000

10001

1001 0

1001 1

10100

101 01

101 10

10111

11 000

11 001

11010

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

I28

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

I36

137

138

s-t

--

11100

11101

11110

11 11 1

140

141

142

143

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS

AND

iNSTRUMEWT STATUS

Condition 0 indicates that no service was requested and it was not the

HP

3562A that sent

the SRQ. Conditions 1-8 are the eight USER SRQ softkeys (see "Labeling User SRQs" later

in this section). Condition

9

indicates that disc action under the analyzer's control is finished;

10 shows the same thing for a plotter. Condition 11 is the "window" into the instrument status

(IS) register; any change in the IS register sets this condition. Condition 12 is set if the PwrSRQ

ON OFF softkey (in the

SPCL

FCTN

menu) is ON and power is applied to the analyzer. Con-

dition 13 is set if key code monitoring is enabled and a key on the analyzer's front panel

is pressed. Conditions 14,15 and 128-143 are provided for controllers incapable of passing

control; refer to "Passing Control" later in this chapter.

The status byte can indicate up to three conditions simultaneously:

1. Occurrence of an error with ERR (bit 5)

2.

Readiness to accept more commands with

RDY

(bit

4)

3. One of the 32 other conditions (bits 7,3,2,1,0)

The analyzer remembers one status condition beyond the one shown in the status byte.

For example, assume the power-on and key pressed conditions are both enabled, and

you power on and press a key. If you then read the status byte, it indicates the power-on SRQ

(which occurred first). Since reading the status byte this time clears it, reading it again shows

the key pressed condition. This queuing applies only to conditions 1-12. When conditions 13-143

are set, they must be serviced and cleared before the analyzer can continue.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-CommandlComniunication

Group

SERVICE REQUESTS AND INSTRUMENT STATUS

Masking

the

Status

When a condition is "masked," it is prevented from generating an SRQ when it becomes

true. At power-on, all conditions except the power-on SRQ are masked (disabled), but it is

a good idea to explicitly mask and unmask conditions as needed. Masking a condition does

not prevent it from occurring, nor does it prevent the condition code from being set. Table 6-4

summarizes status byte masking.

Table

6-4

Masking Status

Byte

Conditions

Condition

0

1-8

9-10

11

12

13

14-15

16 (RDY)

32 (ERR)

64 (RQS)

128-143

How

to

Mask

not maskable (never generates an

SRQ)

not maskable

masked with

SRQD;

unmasked with

SRQE

masked with ISMn, where n is decimal equivalent of the bits

in the IS register to be unmasked. This bit

is completely

masked by sending ISMO.

masked with

PSRQO;

unmasked with

PSRQI

masked with

KEYD;

unmasked with

KEYE

not maskable

masked with

RDYD;

unmasked with

RDYE

masked with

ERRD;

unmasked with

ERRE

not maskable (never generates an

SRQ)

not maskable

Conditions

9

and 10 are unmasked with SRQE (optional service request enable) and masked

with SRQD (optional service request disable). Condition 11 is maskedlunmasked indirectly

with ISMn (instrument status mask). Refer to "Masking the IS Register" later in this section

for details. The point here is that unmasking at least one bit in the IS register automatically

unmasks condition 11 in the status byte. Condition 12 is masked by pressing PwrSRQ

ON OFF

to

OFF

(or sending PSRQO over the bus) and unmasked by pressing it

ON

(or sending PSRQ1

over the bus). Condition 13 is masked with KEYD (key code disable) and unmasked with

KEYE

(key code enable). Condition 16 (the RDY bit) is masked with RDYD (ready SRQ disable) and

SRQs are generated only by the status byte; the instrument status (IS) and activity status (AS)

registers must generate SRQs indirectly through the status byte. The IS register can generate

an SRQ if condition 11 in the status byte is enabled. The AS register is twice removed: bit 13 of

the IS register and condition 11 of the status byte must be enabled for the AS to generate an

SRQ.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-Cornmand/Communication

Group

SERVICE REQUESTS AND iWSTRUMENT STATUS

Unlike the status byte, which shows the analyzer's current interaction with the bus, the instru-

ment status (IS) register shows various conditions of the analyzer's internal status. The IS

register does not generate SRQs (at least not directly). True conditions in the IS set condition

11 in the status byte, which in turn sends the SRQ.

Table 6-5 shows the instrument status (IS) register. The contents of the IS are read by

sending the IS? command (which also clears the register). Unlike the status byte, the IS is

not encoded: each bit represents a single conditionlevent. Remember that condition 11 in

the status byte must be enabled (unmasked) before the IS can indirectly generate an SRQ.

Status Register Table

6-5

Instrument

Bit

Value

Measurement pause

Auto sequence pause

End of measurement, capture or

throughput

End of auto sequence

Sweep point ready

Channel

1

over range

Channel

2

over range

Channel

1

half range

Channel

2

half range

Source fault

1

=

yes

0

=

no

Reference unlocked

.Remote marker knob turn

Remote entry knob turn

activity status register change

Power-on test failed

Bit 0 is set when the measurement has been paused, either from the front panel or via HP-IB.

. . . .

--

1s

c~t-wbbw ~

v

as^&

capture, or throughput ends. For averaged measurements, this is at the completion of the last

average. When averaging is off, it is set after each measurement. Bit 3 is set when an auto

sequence is finished. Bit

4

is set when the analyzer is in the swept sine mode and a sweep

point is ready. Bits 5-6 can be set only when a measurement, capture, or throughput is in

progress. Bits 7-8 are set if the signal reaches half-range at least once during the measure-

when a source fault occurs that causes the source to supply more than 12 ment. Bit

9

indicates

volts. Bit 10 indicates whether the analyzer is locked to the external reference signal (at the EXT

REF

IN

rear panel connector). Bits 11 and 12 indicate that the Markers and Entry knobs,

respectively, have been moved. Bit 13 indicates a change in the activity status register. Bit 14 is

set if the power-on self test fails.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication

Group

SERVICE REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT STATUS

Most of these bits have corresponding HP-IB commands. Bits

0

and

2

works with SMSD; refer

to "Measurement Done Status" later in this section. Bit 4 works with SSWP; refer to "Sending

Sweep Points" later in this section. Bits 5-6 work with SOVl and SOV21; refer to "Overflow

Status" later in this section. Bit

9

works with SFLT; refer to "Source Fault Status" later in this

chapter. Bit 10 works with RLOK; refer to "Reference Lock status" later in this section. Bits 11

and 12 work with the remote knob commands; refer to "Communicating with the Front Panel"

later in this chapter.

Masking

the

lnstrurment Status

Register

Bits in the IS are masked with the lSMn command, where n is the decimal equivalent of the

sum of the values of the bits to be unmasked. For example, the BASIC statement

OUTPUT 720;"1SM20"

unmasks bit 2 (value

=

4) and bit 4 (value =16), and masks all other bits. Remember that at

least one bit in the IS must be unmasked to unmask condition 11 in the status byte. At power-

on, the IS mask defaults to all bits masked. You can read the current masking of the IS register

with the ISM? query:

OUTPUT 720;"ISM?"

ENTER 720;IS-mask

PRINT IS-mask

Bit

4

(sweep point ready) can also be masked with DSWQ (disable sweep SRQ) and

unmasked with ESWQ (enable sweep SRQ). Bit 11 (remote marker knob turn) can be masked

with RMKD (remote marker knob disable) and unmasked with RMKE (remote marker knob

enable). Bit 12 can be masked with REND (remote entry knob disable) and unmasked with

remote RENE (remote entry knob enable).

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-CommandlCommunication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS AND INSTRUMENT STATUS

The status query command (STA?) provides some information from both the status byte and

the instrument status register. Sending STA? causes the HP 3562A to return the 16-bit word

shown in table 6-6. Note that STA? does not clear the information shown in these bits.

Table

6-6

The

STA?

Word

Bit

Value

Not used

Not used

Key pressed

Not used

RDY

ERR

RQS

Message on screen

Measurement pause

Auto sequence pause

End of measurement

End of auto sequence

Sweep point ready

Channel

1

over range

Channel

2

over range

Math overflow

The only unique information provided by STA? is the message on screen indicator (bit

7).

This

is set when a message is displayed in the message field on the screen. This field is the second

line from the bottom on the right side. Messages appear in half-bright upper and lower case.

To read the message, send the display message query command (DSP?), which returns up to

ENTER 720;Status

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-CommandlCommunication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT STATUS

"Ie

Activity

Status

We

The activity status (AS) register indicates several aspects of the

HP

3562A's current activity.

It generates SRQs through the IS register, then through the the status byte. Unlike the status

byte and IS, reading the AS register with AS? does not erase it. The AS register indicates

events, as opposed to conditions. Consequently, it is possible to receive an

SRQ

caused

by the AS, then find the register empty when you read it with AS?. Keep this in mind when

programming for AS-based interrupts.

Table 6-7 shows the activity status (AS) register. The contents of the AS are read by sending

the AS? command (which also clears the register). Unlike the status byte and like the IS, the

AS is not encoded: each bit represents a single condition. Remember that both bit 13 of the

IS and condition

11

of the status byte must be enabled before the AS can indirectly generate

an SRQ.

Table

6-7

Activity Status Register

Bit

Value Event

Check fault log

Filling time record

Filters settling

Curve fit in progress

Missed sample (when in external sample)

Timed preview

Accept data

Waiting for trigger

Waiting for arm

not used

Ramping source

Diagnostic in progress

Marker calc in progress

Use these event indicators to monitor the analyzer's activity after assigning tasks to it. Bit

0

Snbimhmmrwinsidrrtm~rterdhntat

-..--

~T~ieTaulr-

log is intended for use by trained service people only; refer to the

UP

3562A

Service

Manual

for details. Bit

1

indicates that the time record is being filled, which becomes more noticeable

as the frequency span decreases (increasing the time record length). Bit 3 indicates that a

curve fit is in progress. Bit

4

indicates that a sample was missed while in external sampling

because the external sampling frequency is too high. Bits 5 and 6 are used with previewing

in the linear resolution mode. Bit 5 indicates that the analyzer is paused for a time preview,

and bit

6

tells whether or not the last time record was accepted. Bits 7 and

8

indicate that the

analyzer is waiting for the trigger signal or manual arming, respectively. Bit

9

indicates that the

that the source is being ramped. Bit

11

indi- calibration routine is in progress. Bit

10

indicates

cates that a service diagnostic is in progress. Finally, bit 12 indicates that a special marker

calculation is in progress.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-Cornmand/Comrnunication

Group

SERVICE

REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT STATUS

Because it monitors events, the AS must be masked for the positive-going or the negative-

going transition of each bit. Two commands are used to mask the AS register. ASMHn

unmasks the bits equal to n as they change from low to high

(0

to 1). ASMLn unmasks the bits

The current masking of the AS can be read as they change from high to low (I to

0).

with the ASML? and ASMH? queries:

OUTPUT 720;"ASML?"

ENTER 720;ASM-low

OUTPUT 720;"ASMH?"

ENTER 720;ASM-high

PRINT ASM-low,ASM-high

As an example of AS masking, the BASIC statements

OUTPUT 720;"ISM8192"

OUTPUT 720;"ASML8"

detect when a curve fit currently in progress finishes. The ISM8192 unmasks two conditions

simultaneously: by unmasking at least one bit in the IS, it unmasks condition 11 in the status

byte (instrument status change); and by unmasking bit 13 in the IS, it allows changes in the

AS register to be communicated to the IS register. The second statement, ASML8, unmasks

bit 8 in the AS (curve fit in progress) for its transition from high to low. While the curve fit is in

progress, bit

8

is high; as soon as the fit ends, bit 8 drops low. This in turn sets bit 13 in the IS,

which then sets condition 11 in the status byte and sends the SRQ. The flowchart in figure 6-1

summarizes these actions.

UNMASK BIT 13

IN INSTRUMENT

STATUS REGISTER

CHANGE BIT

8

IN THE ACTIVITY STATUS

FROM HIGH TO LOW

SETCONDITION 11

IN THE STATUS BYTE

INDICATING TRUE CONDITION

(BlT13) IN THE INSTRUMENT

STATUS

GENERATE SRQ

BECAUSE THERE IS AN

UNMASKED TRUE CONDITION

BIT11) IN THE

.&us

BYTE

Figure

GI

Example of Activity Status Masking

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-CommandlCornmunication

Group

SERVICE REQUESTS AND INSTRUMENT

STATUS

The HP 3562A offers a special class of interrupts called user SRQs. These allow you to initiate

the SRQ whenever you want to, rather than depending on the device to issue one when it

needs to. Under the HP-IB FCTN key; there is a softkey labeled USER SRQ. This softkey

displays a menu containing the USER SRQl through USER SRQ8 softkeys. You can label

each of these softkeys and individually detect the eight user SRQs. This feature has exten-

sive implications: by utilizing the user SRQ softkeys, you can run the controller in the "back-

ground'' while operating the analyzer from its front panel softkeys. You can create an entire

menu structure by redefining the USER SRQ menu with the controller program. Labels are

saved in nonvolatile memory and are not affected by power-down or preset.

To label the USER SRQ softkeys, use the LBSI-LBS8 commands. Labels can be one or two

lines, with a maximum of six characters per line. The label must be enclosed in single or

double quote marks, and if two lines are labeled, they must be separated by a comma. For

example, the BASIC statement:

OUTPUT 720;"LBS4'TWO,LINES"'

labels the USER SRQ4 softkey as

TWO

LINES

Labels can contain letters, numbers, and any punctuation that does not affect command

syntax. Lines with fewer than six characters are automatically centered. Refer to "The Status

Byte" earlier in this chapter for handling the SRQs generated by user SRQs. An example

program written in BASIC 3.0 that labels and handles all eight user SRQs is provided in the

Introductory Programming Guide in Appendix A.

y setting the PwrSRQ ON OFF softkey in the SPCL FCTN menu to ON, you can command

0

o sena an

s

w en

I

in nonvolatile memory in the analyzer, so it is not affected by power-down or reset. The power-

on SRQ is detected as condition 12 in the status byte; see "The Status Byte" earlier in the

chapter for information on decoding the status byte.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT STATUS

eading

Sweep

Points

(SSWP)

When the HP 3562A is measuring in the swept sine mode, you can read each sweep point via

HP-IB. This allows you to write your own auto adjustments programs, for example. The send

sweep point command (SSWP) is used in conjunction with the sweep point ready condition

(bit 4) in the instrument status register.

The general procedure for reading the sweep points is:

1.

Enable the sweep point ready bit in the instrument

status register using ESWQ or enable the sweep point ready SRQ with ISM.

2.

Start the sweep.

3.

Wait for the SRQ interrupt.

4. Decode the status byte and instrument status register to

verify that the sweep is indeed ready.

5. Tell the analyzer to send the sweep point using SSWP.

6.

Go back to step

3

and wait for the next point.

7. Disable sweep point with DSWQ when finished.

An alternative to the interrupt-driven method is reading the IS register in

a

loop, which would

replace steps 3 and

4.

SSWP returns five variables, in the following order:

Input power

Output Power

Cross spectrum real part

Cross spectrum imaginarv part

Frequency

The first four are floating point real variables, and frequency is long floating point. An example

program written in HP BASIC 3.0 that reads sweep points and displays them on the controller's

CRT is provided in the Introductory Programming Guide in Appendix A.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

SEWlCE

REQUESTS

AND

iNSTRUMENT

STATUS

Chapter

6-Cornmand/Cornmunication

Group

eady

Status

Query

(W

The ready status query (RDY?) indicates whether or the not the analyzer's HP-IB command

buffer is full. It returns either a 1 (buffer is empty) or a 0 (buffer has some commands). The

HP 3562A always returns a1 in response to the RDY? query. Use the RDY bit in

the status byte if you need to monitor the command buffer.

The HP-IB command buffer can store three lines of 80 bytes each.

A

line is defined to be

terminated by a line feed command or activation of the EOI bus management line. Commands

can be queued in the buffer, and they are processed as soon as they are received. When the

buffer is full, the HP-IB handshaking sequence forces the controller to wait.

Source FzruBt Status (SFLT)

The source fault status query (SFLT) returns

a

1

if a failure in the source is causing it to supply

over

12

volts.

A

0 is returned when the source level is in its normal operating range.

Reference Locked Status

(WBOK)

The reference locked status command (RLOK) indicates whether or not the analyzer is

locked to an external reference signal (applied to the EXT REF IN rear panel connector).

A

1

is returned if it is locked, a 0 if not. This command provides the same information as bit 10

in the instrument status register.

Measurement

Done

Status (SMS

The measurement done status command (SMSD) indicates if a measurement, capture or

throughput is in progress. SMSD returns a1 if the measurement, capture

or

throughput is done

Missed

Sample

Status (SMSP)

The missed sample status command (SMSP) indicates if the analyzer missed a sample while in

external sampling. This is caused by an external sample rate greater than 256 kHz.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS AND INSTRUMENT STATUS

The send overflow status commands (SOVI and SOV2) return a

I

if an overrange occurred in

if not. ~hese flags are set only during a measurement and are

the last measurement, and a

0

cleared only by reading.

Identify

Query

(I

This query (ID?) is used to identify devices on the bus. The

HP

3562A responds to ID? by

returning the -/-character string "HP3562A."

This query

(REV?)

identifies the revision code of the software contained and the instrument and

code and format convention revision to which the software is written. For example, the BASIC

statements:

OUTPUT

720;

"REV?"

ENTER

720;

Software, Format

PRINT

Software, Format

Provide the software and format codes.

Serial

Number

Query

(SER?)

This command is a partial implementation of the serial number query. The

HP

3562A

responds to it returning a 10-character string: prefix

(4

numbers indicating the date of the

analyzer's introduction), country of manufacture (A for USA), and 5 zeros. Individual instru-

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT

STATUS

Setup

State

Transfer

(

The SET? command dumps the current instrument state in the ANSI floating point format.

The SET command loads a state that has been previously dumped with SET? back into the

analyzer. SET? is interchangeable with the DSAN (Dump State in ANsi) command, and SET

is interchangeable with the LSAN (Load State in ANsi) command. Please refer to Chapter

3

for information on using DSAN and LSAN.

er

Enable

(HPT)

In addition to the triggering modes selectable from the front panel, the analyzer can also be

triggered via HP-IB. To do this, you first need to select HP-IB triggering by sending the HPT

command. Once HPT is sent, the analyzer can respond to the HP-IB bus management com-

mand "TRIGGER."

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERViCE REQUESTS

AND

iMSTRUMENT STATUS

Passing

Control

The HP 3562A is capable of controlling the bus so that it can control plotters, access disc

drives and output command strings. When it needs control of the bus, the most efficient

method is to:

1. Send the CTAD command (controller address) to the HP 3562A telling it where to

pass control back to when it is finished.

2. Send the command that requires the analyzer to have control of the bus; STPL

(START PLOT), for example.

3. Wait for the analyzer to issue an SRQ saying its needs control of the bus.

4. Pass control to the analyzer. This is a controller-dependent operation; HP BASIC

for this purpose.

3.0 provides the PASS

CONTROL

command

5. Wait for the HP 3562A to send a second SRQ saying it is finished with the bus.

You can, of course, have the controller continue its program without waiting for the

analyzer to release control of the bus if regaining control, is not important. In any

case, the HP 3562A automatically passes control back to the controller specified

by CTAD when

it no longer needs it.

The Introductory Programming Guide in Appendix A provides two examples of passing

control, one for plotter control and one for. sharing a disc drive with a controller.

If your controller is incapable of passing control, use status byte conditions 14,15 and 128-143

to detect when each device on the bus needs to talk and listen. Then explicitly address and

unaddress each device as needed to complete the data transfer. Your controller's HP-IB docu-

mentation should explain its use of the HP-IB secondary commands needed to do this.

A troubleshooting hint: if your controller grabs control of the bus before the HP 3562A is

finished, see if some other device on the bus is sending an inadvertent SRQ. Such an SRQ

Time-Out

Control

To enable time-out control, send TMOE. This causes the

HP

3562A to abort bus activity if it

has control and a device under its control does not respond to a command after -5s. To

disable time-out, send TMOD. TMOE is the default.

Error Codes

The Error query (ERR?) returns the error code of the last HP-IB error. Each error code has a

corresponding description in table 6-9. Note that these are the same errors as those encoun-

tered in front panel operation. For complete descriptions, with suggested corrective actions,

refer to Appendix B of the

UP 3562A

Operating

Manual,

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

SERVICE

REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT

STNUS

Chapter 6-CommandlCommunication Group

Table

6-9

Error

Codes

Code

Error

No Peak Avg in HIST Meas

No Peak Avg in CORR Meas

Freq Resp, No

1

Ch Demod

Cross Corr, No

1

Ch Demod

No fundamental

X

Marker Must Be Active

Buffer Overflow

No Coord Change Allowed

Not In Frequency Domain

No Data

Code

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

300

3 01

302

303

304

305

306

307

308

309

400

401

402

403

500

600

601

602

603

604

605

606

607

608

Error

Not Active Softkey

Unknown Mnemonic

Line Too Long

Command Too Long

Alpha Delimiter Expected

Not A Valid Terminator

Extra Chars In Command

Function Inactive

Missing lnput

Not Valid Units

Not A Valid Number

Alpha Too Long

Number Too Long

Out Of Range

Unable To Curve Fit

Bad

#

Of Parameters

Auto Carrier Selected

ENTRY Not Enabled

Not A Valid Block Length

Not A Valid Block Mode

Not HP-IB Controller

HP-IB Time Out

Bad Plotter Data Read

Cannot Recall Throughput

Not A Valid Catalog

Unformatted Disc

Catalog Full

Not A Valid Name

Not A Valid Display

File Not Found

Disc Full

Unknown Disc command Set

No Disc In Drive

Disc Write Protected

Disc Fault

Disc Transfer Error

No Spares Or Fault Areas

No Thruput File

Catalog Not In Memory

File Size Not Specified

Select Capture To Recall

Source

=

Destination

Sector Size

< >

256

Bytes

Not Valid Format Option

Not Valid For This Disc

Destination Too Small

Measurement In Progress

Trace Not Compatible

Data Type Incompatible

Data Blocks Incompatible

Source Block Empty

User Display Not Enabled

No Active Display Buffer

Recursive Call

Not A Valid Auto Math

Bad Setup State

Bad Auto Sequence Table

Bad Synth Table

Bad Non-Volatile State

Bad Data Block

Bad Data Header

Marker Not On

No Valid Marker Units

No Capture Data

No Thruput Data

Thruput Data Too Long

Bad Curve Fit Table

Bad Capture

Not A valid User Window

Bad Primitive Block

View lnput Disabled

Cannot Use Zoom Data

Already Running

May Be Inaccurate

Cannot Be Complex

Bad Delete Freq Table

Loops Nested Too Deep

Demod In Zoom Only

Numeric Overflow

Invalid: NyquistlNichols

Invalid: Log Data

No Carrier

No Peak Hold In Time Avg

Calibration In Progess

No Avg in Demod Hist

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-Comrnand/Communication

Group

READING

MARKER VALUES

The HP 3562A allows you to read the

X

marker and the slope and power special marker

functions via HP-IB. (The Y marker is not tied to display data, so there is little value in reading

it over the bus.) This section explains the commands used for these functions and the data

they provide. The Introductory Programming Guide in Appendix A has a example program

in HP BASIC

3.0

that reads all three marker values. Note that before reading marker values,

you should explicitly sd the units and coordinates in which you want the trace to be calculated.

Reading

the

X

Marker (WDM

The read marker command (RDMK) returns two long floating-point numbers: the x-axis

("X

=

")and y-axis ("Ya

=

"

or "Yb

=

")

values of the

X

marker. The following BASIC statements

read the

X

marker:

OUTPUT 720; "RDMK"

ENTER 720; X,Ya

PRINT "X= ";X,"Ya= ";Ya

Weadlwg

the

Special

Marker

Once

(RSMO)

The read special marker once command (RSMO) returns the value of the POWER, FREQ &

DAMP or AVG VALUE special marker function, whichever one was pressed last for each trace.

This is a long floating point value and is scaled in the current display coordinates and units. The

following BASIC statements read whichever of these marker functions is active:

OUTPUT 720; "RSMO"

ENTER 720; MarkerVala, Marker-Valb

PRINT MarkerVal

The read special marker group command (RSMG) returns the value of the SLOPE, HMNC

POWER, THD or SBAND POWER special marker function, whichever one is active for each

trace. This is a long floating point value and is scaled in the current units and coordinates. The

following BASIC statements read the SLOPE marker:

OUTPUT 720; "RSMG"

ENTER 720; Slope

a,

Slope b

PRINT Slope

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-CommandlComrnunication Group

COUMUNICBSING

WITH

THE FRONT

PANEL

The rest of this chapter shows you how to communicate with the analyzer's front panel: keys,

eight softkeys, and two knobs. The end of this section shows you how to write messages to the

message field and control display updating.

Each key and the eight generic softkeys are assigned key code. You can use these codes in

two ways: monitor key presses by interpreting key codes, and simulate key presses by sending

key codes to the analyzer.

There are four commands used with this feature. KEY? is a query that returns the key code

of the last key pressed since power-up or reset (if KEYE has been sent previously). KEYn

sends a key code, where n is the code from

1

to 70, to the analyzer. And there are two

commands used for masking/unmasking the key pressed condition in the status byte. KEYD

masks (disables) the condition, and KEYE unmasks it.

Table 6-10 lists the HP 3562A's key codes. Note that the eight softkey buttons have unique

codes, but individual softkey labels do not. The code of the last key pressed (since power-up

or reset) is returned by the KEY? command. Key presses are simulated by sending the ana-

lyzer the KEYn command, where n is the code of the key to be simulated. The key buffer holds

the last three key presses.

COM? returns the HP-IB command of the last key pressed (this is

useful for detecting softkeys).

Table

6-10

Key Codes

Key Name

No Key Pressed

ENGR UNITS

INPUT COUPLE

TRIG DELAY

HP-IB FCTN

9EC

SELECT TRIG

CAL

RANGE

AVG

SELECT M EAS

WINDOW

LOCAL

PLOT

SOURCE

FREQ

MEAS MODE

START

SPCL FCTN

PRESET

MATH

SYNTH

AUTO SEQ

Code

0

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

2 1

22

.

36

Softkey 4

Softkey 5 37

Softkey 2 38

39 Softkey 1 (top)

@

Key Name Code

/

5

6

4

Softkey 7

Softkey 6

1

3

2

MARKER VALUE

-

(negative sign)

4 1

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

BACKSPACE 5 1

Softkey 8 (bottom) 52

VIEW INPUT 53

0 54

, (comma) 55

A

.

(decimal point)

56

57

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

COMMUNICATlNG WITH

THE FRONT

PANEL

Table

6-10

(Continued)

PAUSE CONT

SAVE RECALL

Y

B

A&B

COORD

SPCL MARKER

HELP

AUTO MATH

CURVE FIT

X

OFF

X

Y

OFF

8

9

7

MEAS DlSP

ARM

SINGLE

UPPER LOWER

STATE TRACE

UNITS

FRONT BACK

SCALE

UP arrow

DOWN arrow

Weeding

Entry

Knob

Mowemelat

The rotary pulse generator (RPG) knob in the Entry group can be addressed via HP-18.

You can use the knob to generate SRQs or use it to send numeric values to the controller.

To set up the knob in the Entry group to generate SRQs as it is rotated, you need use the

instrument status register. Bit 12 in this register is used to indirectly generate the SRQ; refer

to "The Instrument Status Register" earlier in this chapter.

32 767. To program its value, use the RENV

The knob has a numeric range of -32 768 to

+

command (remote entry knob value). To read its current value, use the RENV? query. The

Entry knob has variable acceleration, which you set with the RENS (Remote Entry Knob

Speed) command. RENSO, 32767: specifies fixed acceleration, and RENSI, 32767 specifies

variable acceleration. Use RENE to enable remote entry, or REND to disable it.

The Markers group knob can also be addressed via

HP-IB.

This knob uses bit I1 in the

instrument status register. Addressing the Markers knob is similar to addressing the Entry

knob; the difference is that the acceleration of the Markers knob is fixed. To program its value,

use the RMKV command (remote markers knob value). To read its current value, use the

RMKV? query. Send RMKE to enable remote markers, RMKD to disable. When remote mark-

ers are enabled, the

X

and Y marker values should not be set.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-Cornrnand/Communication

Group

COMMUNICATING

WITH

THE

FRONT

PANEL

Writing

to

the

Message

You can write messages up to

24

characters long to the displays message field. Use the DSP

command and put the message string in single quotes. For example, the BASIC statement:

OUTPUT 720;"DSPiHi

Mom'."

Display "Hi

Mom"

(without quotes) in the message field. To read the message currently in the

field, use the DSP? query, which returns an alphanumeric string up to

24

characters long. For

example:

OUTPUT 720; "DSP?"

ENTER 720; Message$

PRINT

Message$

Reads and prints the current message. When a measurement is started a "blank message is

displayed, which sets bit

7 of the STA? word.

Controlliing

Display

Updating

Two commands are provided to enableidisable updating on the display. To disable updating,

send the DSPD (display disable) command. To enable it, send DSPE (display enable). Note

that once you send DSPD, updating is disabled until you re-enable it by sending DSPE or

resetting the analyzer.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-CommandiCommunication Group

COMMUNICATING WITH THE

FRONT

PANEL

The values calculated by the demodulation algorithm's auto carrier feature can be read via

HP-IB. The command SACR (Send Auto Carrier) returns four values:

Auto carrier calculated for Channel

1

Auto carrier calculated for Channel 2

Phase offset removed from Channel

1

Phase offset removed from Channel 2

For example, the BASIC statements:

OUTPUT 720; "SACR"

ENTER 720; Carrierl, Carrier2, Phasel, Phase2

return the four values. These values are in floating point format.

Controllling

the

HP Logo for

Plotting

The HP logo that appears at the top of table displays is not normally plotted, but you can

specify it to be plotted if desired. Send the command "LOGOO" to disable it or "LOGOI" to

enable it.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

B

This appendix provides condensed HP-IB programming information for the

HP

3562A

Dynamic Signal Analyzer. It contains the following information in quick reference format:

General command syntax

Response to bus management commands

Command mnemonics, including syntax, limits &terminators

Service requests

Status byte description, including masking

Instrument status register description

Activity status register description

Error codes

Key codes

through

6.

This appendix is intended for

For complete information, please refer to Chapters

1

reference use by programmers familiar with both the HP 3562A and the computer/controller

being used.

The mnemonic list is divided in two parts. The first part contains the front panel (key and

softkey) mnemonics listed al

listed alphabetically.

--

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

GENERAL

COMMAND

SYNTAX

The general syntax for sending commands to the HP 3562A is:

where

<

mnem

>

is the command mnemonic

<

opt sp

>

is ignored optional space

<

para> is first command-dependent parameter

<

sep

>

is required comma

(,)

for multi-parameter commands

<

para> is second command-dependent parameter

<

opt sp

>

is ignored optional space

<

suff

>

is command-dependent suffix

>

is command terminator (semicolon)

For example, to set up a frequency span from 10 to 60 kHz, you would send the command:

FRS 10,60 KHz;

where: FRS

10

is the,mnemonic

is the first command-dependent parameter

is the parameter separator

60 is the second command-dependent parameter

KHz is the command-dependent suffix

is the command terminator

Note that the front panel mnemonics usually emulate the respective key or softkey. In some

cases, suffixes (terminators, delimiters) are not required. The syntax required for every com-

mand is described in the mnemonic table. You should consult this whenever there is a question

about a particular command's syntax.

Parameter

Queries

lo query the current value ot any variaPle parameter, send the appropriate mneriTonlc followed

by a question mark. For example, to learn the current frequency span, send FRS?.

-

--

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

6-Quick

Reference Guide

RESPONSE

TO BUS

MANAGEMENT

COMMANDS

Table

1

summarizes the

HP

3562A's

response to the

HP-IB

primary bus management

commands.

Table

1

Response to Bus Management Commands

Command

ABORT 110

CLEAR LOCKOUT

& SET LOCAL

DEVICE CLEAR

Response

Aborts data input or output and unaddresses the ana-

lyzer. Does not clear the HP-IB command buffer.

Clears local lockout and returns to local control.

Unconditionally interrupts bus activity: clears the HP-

IB command buffer, resets the SRQ line, aborts data

inputloutput, and enters REMOTE mode.

Returns to local (front panel) control and aborts load

operations in progress, but does not abort dump oper-

ations or clear the HP-IB command buffer.

Disables the front panel LOCAL key, but does affect

local/remote status.

Does not respond.'

Does not respond.

Accepts control if needed; passes control back when

finished to address specified by the CTAD command.

Immediately passes control back is it receives control

when it does not need it.

Forces the HP

3562A into the REMOTE mode.

LOCAL

LOCAL LOCKOUT

PARALLEL POLL

PARALLEL POLL

CONFIGURE

PASS CONTROL

REMOTE

TRIGGER

Accepts HP-IB triggering if it is first enabled by send-

ing the analyzer the HPT command.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL COMMANDS

NAME

MNEM

RANGE SUFFIXES SYNTAX

A & B TRACES ABTR

ABTR

A GAIN

ON OFF

A GAIN

SELECT

ABORT CAPTUR

ABORT HPlB

ABORT THRUPT

ACTIVE FILE

ADD

AGON

AGSE

ABCP

ABlB

ABTH

ACFL

ADD

0 or

1

AGONI

=

on

AGONO

=

off

AGFN

ABCP

ABlB

ABTH

alpha

10+38

TRACE A (TRCA)

TRACE B (TRCB)

SAVED

I

(SAVI)

SAVED 2 (SAV2)

ACFL'aaaaaaaa'

ADDrrrr

ADDssss

ADD LINE ADDL see comment

ADDL (auto

sequence; all subse-

quent commands are

entered in asea

MHz,

HZ, KHz ADLNrr,rrss (curve fit

table)

ADD LINE

ADD REG

ADD VALUE

ADDRESS ONLY

AM CHAN 1

AM CHAN 2

ANNOT A PEN

ANNOT B PEN

ARM

ADLN 10+.38

ADDV

ADRS

AM

I

AM2

ANAP

ANBP

ARM

10+38 MHz, HZ, KHz ADDVrr,rrss

ADRS

AM

1

AM2

0-8

0-8

+

+

ANAPrr (number lim-

ited by plotter)

ANBPrr (number lim-

ited by plotter)

ARM

r

=

value within the range specified in the RANGE column

from the SUFFIX collumn s

=

one of the suffixes

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

MNEM RANGE SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

ARMAO

=

manual

ARMAI

=

auto

ASFN

ARM AU MAN

ASEQ FCTN

ASEQ MESSGE

AT POINTR

AUTO 1 RNG UP

AUTO

1

UP&DWN

.

AUTO 2 RNG UP

AUTO 2 UP&DWN

AUTO CORR

AUTO CORRI

AUTO CORR2

AUTO CRRIER

AUTO INTGRT

AUTO

MATH

AUTO MATH

AUTO ON OFF

AUTO ORDER

ARMA

ASFN

ASMS

ATPT

AUl U

AUI

AU2U

AU2

AUCR

AUCI

AU C2

ACRR

AUlN

AMTH

AUMT

AUTO

AUOR

ASEQ

Oor 1

alpha

ASMS'aa. .a' (24 char.

max)

ATPT

AUl U

AU 1

AU2U

AU2

AUCR

AUCl

ACRR

AUlN

AMTH (AUTO

MATH

key)

AUMT (AUTO MATH

softkey)

AUTO0

=

off

AUTO1

=

on

AUOR

ASEQ

AUWT

1-32767 AVGrrrr

AVRG

AVOF

AVGV

AUTO WEIGHT

AVG

AVRG

AVG OFF

AVG VALUE

AU WT

AVG

AVRG

AVOF

AVGV

BEEPER ON OFF

BURST CHIRP

BEEP

BCRP 1-99

BEEP0

=

off

BEEP1

=

on

BCRPrr

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B4uick Reference

Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

BURST RANDOM

CAL

CALCOFF(HMNC)

CALC OFF (SBAND)

CAPTUR HEADER

CAPTUR LENGTH

MNEM

BRND

CAL

CAOF

CLOF

CHED

CLEN

RANGE

1-99

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

BRNDrr

CAL

CAOF

CLOF

CHED

see comment USEC, MSEC, SEC

MIN, REVS, PNTS

REC

(same as CAPTUR LENGTH)

CLENrrss (range

depends on suffix; 10

records or equivalent

limits)

CPNTrrss

CPSE

CAPTUR POlNTR

CAPTUR SELECT

CATLOG POINTR

CDF 1

CDF 2

CENTER FREQ

CPNT

CPSE

CTPT

CDFI

CDF2

CF

1-20 CTPTrr

CDFl

CDF2

see comment MHz, HZ, KHz

ORD, RMP

CFrrss (range limited

to 100 kHz

-

(1 0.24

m

H

2

12)

CHI

CHI 2

CH2

CH 1 ACTIVE

CH 1 &2 ACTIVE

CH 2 ACTIVE

CHAN 1 AC DC

CHAN 1 DELAY

CHI

CHI2

CH2

C1 AC

Cl DL

Oor 1

see comment USEC, MSEC,

SEC, MIN,

REVS, REC

CI AC 0

=

dc

ClAC 1

=

ac

C1 DLrrss (range

depends on suffrx;

-

4095 points and

50 records are

+

-

CHAN

I

INPUT

CHAN 1 RANGE

C1 IN

C1 RG -51 -27 V, MV, VRMS,

MVRM, DBV, EU

C1 IN

Cl RGrrss

(range depends on

suffix; absolute limit is

-

51 to 27 dBV)

+

CHAN 2 AC DC C2AC

C2DL

0 or 1

see comment USEC, MSEC,

SEC, MIN,

REVS, REC

C2DLrrss (range

depends on suffix;

-

4095 points anc!

+

50 records are

absolute limits)

C21N

CHAN 2 DELAY

CHAN 2 INPUT C21N

r

=

value within the range specified inthe

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

CHAN

2

RANGE

MNEM

RANGE

-51

-27

SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

C2RG V, MV, VRMS,

MVRM, DBV, EU

C2RGrrss (range

depends on suffix;

51

absolute limit is

-

to

+

27 dBV

CHGL (for auto

sequences and auto

math; entry is any

valid commamnd)

CHANGE LINE CHGL see comment

CHANGE REGION

CHANGE VALUE

CLEAR ASEQ

CHRG

CHGV

CLAS

0-100

kHz

1oi38

MHz, Hz, KHz

MHz, HZ, KHz

CHRGrr,rrss

CHGVrr,rrss

CLAS (auto sequence

must be displayed

first)

CLLG

CLMA

CLTA (curve fit)

CLTB (synthesis; table

must be displayed

first)

CLRT (delete freq)

COHR

CMPC

CNAS

CNPK

CVTB

CLEAR LOGS

CLEAR MATH

CLEAR TABLE

CLEAR TABLE

CLLG

CLMA

C LTA

CLTB

CLEAR TABLE

COHER

COMPLX CONJ

CONT ASEQ

CONT PEAK

CONVRT TABLE

CLRT

COHR

CMPC

CN AS

CNPK

CVTB

COPY FILES COFl alpha COFl 'aaaaaaaa'

,aaaaaal

COFl'

<

COFI 'aaaaaa,

>'

COFl 'aaa,aaal

CCONrr

CCONrr,rr

CRFT

CREATE CONST

CREATE FIT

CREATE THRUPT

CREATE TRACE

CROSS CORR

CCON

CRFT

CRTH

CTRC

CCOR

10*38

alpha CRTH 'aaaaaaa'

CTRC

CCOR (measurement)

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFJX

column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

B-Quick

Reference

Guide

FRONT

BS

NAME

MNEM

CRCR

CSPC

CRFR

CVFT

CTPG

DSHL

DAAN

DATA

DATE

D B

D BV

DCOF

DEC

DEG

DLTF

DLFR

DLTL

RANGE

SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

CROSS CORR

CROSS SPEC

CRRIER FREQ

CURVE

FIT

CUT PG ON OFF

DASHED LINES

DATA

&

ANNOT

DATA ONLY

DATE M,D,Y

dB

d BV

DC OFFSET

Decade

Degree

DELETE FILE

DELETE FREQ

DELETE LINE

CRCR (display)

CSPC

0-1 00 kHz MHz, HZ,

KHz,

RPM, ORD

CRFRrrss

CVFT

CTPGO

=

off

CTPGl

=

on

DSH L

DAAN

DATA

mm,dd,yy DATEmm,dd,yy

dB (terminator only)

dBV (terminator only)

0-1

0

MV, V, VRMS,

MVRM, DBV

DCOFrrss (max is

1 OVpeak

DEC (terminator only)

DEG (terminator only)

alpha

AT POINTR

DLTF'aaaaaaaa'

DLTFATPT

DLFR

DLTL (auto sequence

or auto math; table

must be displayed

0 or

I

DELETE REGION

DELETE VALUE

DEMOD BOTH

DEMOD CHAN 1

DEMOD CHAN 2

DEMOD ON OFF

DEMOD POLAR

DEMOD SELECT

DLRG

DLTV

DMB

DM1

DM2

DMOD

POLR

DMSE

1-20 DLRGrr

DLTV

DNB

DM1

DM2

Oor

1

DMODO

=

off

DMOD1

=

on

POLR

DMSE

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

=

one of the suffixes from the SUFFIX column s

.

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT PANEL COMMANDS

NAME MNEM RANGE

SUFFiXES SYNTAX

DESTN ADDRES

DESTN UNIT

DFAULT GRIDS

DFAULT LIMITS

DlFF

DlSC

DEAD

DEUN

DFGR

DLlM

DlFF

DISC

Dl AD

DlCO

DlFN

DlST

DlUN

DIV

1-7

5

1-1

DEADr

DEUNrr

DFGR

DLlM

DlFF

DlSC

DISC ADDRES-

DISC COPY

DISC FCTN

DISC STATUS

DISC UNIT

DIV

1-7

DlADr

DlCO

DlFN

DlST

0-1

5

10*38

TRACE A (TRCA)

TRACE B (TRCB)

)

SAVED 1 (SAVI

SAVED 2 (SAV2)

DlUNrr

DlVrrr

DlVssss

DOWN

ARROW

DOWN

DOTS

DSPL

ESMP

EDIT

EDDN

EDLN

LINE

EDMA

EDNM

EDPL

EPOL

EDRS

EDTB

1-20

1-20

1-20

1-20

1-20

1-20

0 or 1

0 or 1

DOWN

DOTS

DSPLO

=

off

DSPLI

=

on

ESMPO

=

off

ESMPI

=

on

EDIT

-- -

DOTS

DSPLAY ON OFF

E SMPL ON OFF

EDIT

EDIT DENOM#

EDIT LINE#

EDIT LINE#

EDIT MATH

EDIT NUMER#

EDIT POLE#

EDIT POLES

EDIT RESDU#

EDIT TABLE

EDDNrr

EDLNrr

LlNErr

EDMA

EDNMrr

EDPLrr

EPOL

EDRSrr

EDTB

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

.

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix 5-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT PANEL COMMAMDS

NAME MNEM

RANGE

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

EDIT WEIGHT

EDIT ZERO#

EDIT ZEROS

END EDIT

EDWT

EDZR

EZER

ENED

1-20

EDWT

EDZRrr

EZER

ENED (auto

sequence or auto

math; table must be

displayed first)

ENGR

ENT (terminator only)

EU (terminator only)

alpha

alpha

EU Ll 'aaaaaa'

EU L2'aaaaaa1

VEU, MVEU, DB

VEU, MVEU,

DB

EUVI rrss

EUV2rrss

rrErr (exponential

notation; example:

1 OE4

=

100 000. D

or L can be used in

place of E.)

EXP

lot38

ENGR

UNITS

ENTER

E U

EU LBL CHAN 1

EU LBL CHAN 2

EU VAL CHAN 1

EU VAL CHAN 2

EXPONENT

ENGR

ENT

EiJ

EULl

EUL2

EUVl

EUV2

+

1nVto

+

1 OOOV

+lnVto

+

1

ooov

E

EXPON

EXPON CHAN 1

EXPON CHAN 2

EXT

F RESP LINRES

F RESP LOGRES

F RESP SWEPT

FAULT LOG

FFT

FFT-I

FILTRD INPUT

FIT FCTN

EXP

XPNl

XPN2

EXT

FRLN

FRLG

FRSW

FTLG

FFT

FFTI

FILT

FTFN

USEC, MSEC,

SEC, MIN, REVS

USEC, MSEC,

SEC, MIN, REVS

XPNI rrss

XPN2rrss

10*38

FRLN

FRLG

FRSW

FTLG (disc service

functions)

FFT

FFTI

FlLT

FTFN

r

=

value within the range specified in the RANGE column

.

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

B-Quick

Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

FIT

-,

SYNTH

FIX LINE#

FIXED INTGRT

FIXED SINE

MMEM

FTSN

FXLN

FXlN

FSlN

RANGE

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

FTSN

1-20 ENT FXLNrr

FXlN

64-1 00000 MHz, HZ, KHz

RPM, ORDS

FSlNrrss (range is

64

HZ

to I00 kHz; entry

limits depend on suf-

fix)

FLAT

FLTl

FLT2

FM

I

FM2

FLAT TOP

FLOAT CHAN 1

FLOAT CHAN 2

FM CHAN 1

FM CHAN

2

FNDMTL FREQ

FORCE CHAN 1

FORCE CHAN 2

FORCEIEXPON

FORMAT

FORMAT OPTION

FREE RUN

FLAT

FLTl

F LT2

FMI

FM2

FNFR

FRCI

FRC2

FOXP

FORM

FOOP

FREE

0-239

0-1 OOk

10+38

MHz, HZ, KHz

RPM, ORDS

USEC, MSEC,

SEC, MIN, REVS

USEC, MSEC,

SEC. MIN. REVS

FNFRrrrsss

FRCl rrrsss

FRC2rrrsss

FOXP

FORM

FOOPrr

FREE

10*38

FREQ RESP

FREQ RESP

FREQ SPAN

Linear Resolution

Log Resolution

Swept Sine

Time Capture

FRQR

FRSP

FRS

10.24 mHz

-

I00 kHz

FRQR (display)

FRSP (measurement)

MHz,

HZ,

KHz,

RPM. ORDS

DEC

MHz,

HZ,

KHz,

DEC, OCT

FRSrrrsss

FRSrDEC

FRSrrrsss

1-5

2 mHz-

100 kHz

same as linear resolution

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the-SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME MNEM RANGE SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

FRBK

FRONT BACK

FST AV ON OFF

FRBK

FSAV 0 or 1

FSAVO

=

off

FSAVI

=

on

GOTOrr

GRID AREA

GRID PEN

GRAR

GRDP

I

-max

GRAR

GRDPrr (max

=

number of pens in

plotter)

GNDI

GROUND CHANI

GROUND CHAN2

HANN

HELP

GNDI

GND2

HAN N

HELP

H IST

HIS1

HIS2

HMNC

HPWR

HXCT

HXLF

HXOF

HXRT

HAN N

HELP

HlST

HIS1

H IS2

HMNC

HPWR

HXCT

HXLF

HXOF

HXRT

HYCL--

HY LW

HYOF

HYUP

0-31 IBADrr

IBFN

HZ (terminator only)

HZS

HZlP (terminator only),

HIMS (terminator only)

.

-

HlST

HlST 1

HlST

2

HMNC ON

HMNC POWER

HOLD X CENTER

HOLD X LEFT

HOLD X OFF

HOLD X RIGHT

HOLDY_CENIELHYCI

HOLD Y LOWER

HOLD Y OFF

HOLD Y UPPER

HP-IB ADDR

HP-IB

FCTN

Hz

HYLW

HYOF

HYUP

IBAD

IBFN

HZ

HZS

HZIP

HlMS

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one

of

the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Hz

(Sec)

HzIPoint

HzImSec

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

MNEM

HZlM

HZlS

HZ10

IMAG

IMBK

IRSP

INCT

INDl

ICPL

ISPI

ISP2

ITM 1

ITM2

INST

IWND

INGR

INGl

INTM

RANGE SUFFlXES SYNTAX

HzlMin

HzISec

HzIOrder

IMAG

IMAGE BACKUP

IMPLS RESP

INIT CATLOG

INIT DISC

INPUT COUPLE

INPUT SPEC

1

INPUT SPEC 2

INPUTTIME

1

INPUT TIME

2

INST

INST WNDOWD

INTGRT

INTGRT INIT= 0

INTGRTTIME

HZlM (terminator

only)

HZlS (terminator only)

HZ10 (terminator only)

IMAG

IMBK

IRSP

alpha

alpha

I NCT'aaaaaa'

IN Dl 'aaaaaa'

ICPL

lSPl

1SP2

ITM 1

ITM2

INST

IWND

INGR

INGl

1 0-3-1

03*

USEC, MSEC, SEC INGRTrrss

JWI

kHz

KHL

KHlO

LSUN

LBLA

LBLM

LSMS

LlNX

not progammable over the HP-IB

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

alpha

alpha

KHz (terminator only)

KHlO (terminator

only)

LSU N

LBLAiaaa,aaa'

LBLM 'aaa,aaal

LSMS

LlNX

kHzIOrder

L SPEC UNITS

LABEL ASEQ

LABEL MATH

LAST M EAS

LIN X

LINE

.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT PANEL COMMANDS

NAME

LINE A TYPE#

MNEM

LlNA

RANGE

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

LINArrr,rrr (number

depends on plotter;

2nd. parameter

optional)

LINBrrr,rrr (number

depends on plotter;

2nd parameter

optional)

LNTP

LNRS

LSPC

LSPl

LSP2

LNSW

LN

I

LN

1-8; see comment

LINE

B

TYPE# LlNB 1-8; see comment

LINE TYPES

LINEAR RES

LINEAR SPEC

LINEAR SPEC 1

LINEAR SPEC 2

LINEAR SWEEP

LN OF DATA

LN-1 OF DATA

LOCAL

LOG RES

LOG SWEEP

LOG X

LOOP TO

LNTP

LNRS

LSPC

LSPl

LSP2

LNSW

LN

LN 1

LCL

LGRS

LGSW

LOGX

LPTO 1-20 (rl)

1-32,767 (r2)

LCL

LGRS

LGSW

LOGX

LPTOrl ,r2 (I st

number

is' end of

loop; 2nd is cycle

count)

MAG (LOG)

'

MAG (dB)

MAG (dBm)

MANUAL PRVIEW

MANUAL SWEEP

MGLG

MGDB

MDBM

MAPR

MNSW

MKVL

MATH

M AXS

M DSP

MGLG

MGDB

MDBM

MAPR

M NSW

MKVL

MATH

M AXS

MDSP

MARKER VALUE

MATH

MAX SPAN

MEAS

DlSP

r

=

value within the range specified in the RANGE column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

B-Quick

Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL COMMANDS

NAME

MEAS MODE

uSec

m EU

WINEM

RANGE SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

MSMD

USEC

MEU

USEC (terminator

only)

MEU (terminator only)

MHz (terminator only)

MHIO (terminator

only)

mSec MSEC

MSEC (terminator

only)

MV (terminator only)

mVlEU

mVrms

MVEU

MVRM

MVEU (terminator

only)

MVRM (terminator

only)

Min

MinlDec

MinlOct

MIN

MlDC

MIOC

MIN (terminator only)

MIDC (terminator

only)

MIOC (terminator

only)

10*38

M PY

M

PY

TRACE A (TRCA)

TRACE B (TRCB)

SAVED

1

(SAVI)

SAVED 2 (SAV2)

-

MPYrrr

M PYssss

MRKR

-+

PEAK

--

NEGATE

MKPK

NEG

NXT

MKPK

NEG

NXT (MATH menu,

first level)

NEX (MATH menu,

second level)

NEXT (COOWD

menu)

NX

(AVG

menu)

NXTP (disc catalog)

NXPG (disc service

logs)

--

NEXT N EX

NEXT

NEXT

NEXT PAGE

NEXT PAGE

NX

NXTP

NXPG

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

-

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

B-Quick

Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

NEXT RECORD

N ICHOL

NO

MNEM

NXRC

NlCL

RANGE

SUFFlXES SYNTAX

NXRC

NlCL

Use REJT in place of NO for previewing over the bus

NOPG

NAVG

N POL

NZER

NYQT

OClM

OClS

OCT

OHM

ORBT

ORD

ORDR

ORCL

OU LG

not programmable via HP-IB

OVRJO

=

off

OVRJl

=

on

10*3*

1-32767

1-40

1-40

NOPG

NAVGrrr

NPOLrr

NZERrr

NYQT

OClM (terminator

only)

OCIS (terminator only)

OCT (terminator only)

OHM (terminator only)

ORBT

ORD (terminator only)

ORDR

NO PAGING

NUMBER AVGS

NUMBER POLES

NUMBER ZEROS

NYQUST

OctIMin

OctISec

Octave

Ohm

ORBITS TI vsT2

Orders

Orders (Revs)

Orders CAL

OUTPUT LOG

OUTPUT STRING

H

HZIO, KHlO

M

ORCL rrr sss

OU LG

OVER WRITE

OVERWR AU MAN

OVR LP%

P SPEC LINRES

P SPEC UN'ITS

PACK DISC

PAGE BACK

PAGE FORWRD

PAGING CONTRL

OVWR

OVAU

OVLP

PSLN

PSUN

PKDl

PGBK

PGFW

PCTL

0

or

1

OVWR

OVAUO

=

off

OVAUl

=

on

OVLPrr

PSLN

PSU N

PKDl

PGBK

PGFW

PCTL

1-90

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

cohmn

s

=

one

of

the suffixes from the SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL COMMANDS

Front

Panel

Comman

NAME

PAUSE ASEQ

PAUSE CONT

MNEM

RANGE

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

PSAS

PSCN

PSCN toggles

PAUS-pauses

CONT-continues

PDFl

PDF

1

PDF 2

PEAK HOLD

PHASE

PLOT

PLOT ADDRES

PLOT AREA

PLOT LIMITS

PLOT PRESET

PM CHAN

1

PM CHAN

2

PMlFM CRRIER

Points

PointslDec

PointslOct

PointslSweep

POLARAMvsPM

POLE RESIDU

POLE ZERO

POLY-NOM IAL

POWER

POWER SPEC

POWER SPEC 1

POWER SPEC 2

PRESET

-

PDFl

PDF2

PHLD

PHSE

PLOT

PLAD

PLAR

PLlM

PLPR

PM 1

PM2

PFCR

PNTS

PIDC

PlOC

PISW

POLR

PRSD

PZRO

POLY

PWR

PSPC

PSPI

PSP2

PRST

PRVP

0-31

+_I80 DEG

PHLD

PHSErrrDEG

PLOT

PLADrr

PLAR

PLlM

PLPR

PMI

PM2

PFCR

PNTS (terminator

only)

PIDC (terminator only)

PlOC (terminator only)

PISW (terminator only)

PRSD

PZRO

POLY

PWR

PSPC

PSPI

PSP2

PRST

PRVP

-

PREV PAGE

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixesfrom the SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

B-Quick

Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

PRIODC CHIRP

PROTCT ON OFF

PRVIEW OFF

PRVIEW ON OFF

PulselRev

PwrSRQ ON OFF

RAMP TIME

MNEM

PCRP

PTON

PROF

PRON

PlRV

PSRQ

RANGE

1-99

0 or

1

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

PCRPrr

PTONO

=

off

PTONI

=

on

PROF

PRONO

=

off

PRONI

=

on

PlRV (terminator only)

0 or 1

10+38 USEC, MSEC,

SEC, MIN, REC

PSRQO

=

off

PSRQl

=

on

RAMPrrrsss (limit is

*3%; entry'range

10

depends on suffix)

RND

RAMP

RANDOM NOISE RND

RNG -51 to

+

27 dBV

RANGE

Y

MV, VRMS,

MVRM, DBVR,

RNGrrrsss

(entry is EU optional;

range depends on

suffix)

RDPI

READ PEN-+Pl

READ PEN+P2

REAL

REAL PART

RECALL DATA#

RECALL FILE

RDPI

RDP2

REAL

RLPT

RCLD

RCFL

1 or2

alpha

REAL

RLPT

RCLDr

RCFL'aaaaaaa'

REClP

Recoid

REF CHAN

1

REF CHAN 2

REF LEVEL

RESLTN

RClP

REC

RFCl

RFC2

RFLV

R ES

5 mV to

31.5 Vpk

REClP

REC (terminator only)

RFCI

RFC2

.

V,

MV, VRMS, MVRM,

DBVR, EU

RFLVrrrsss

RESrrrsss

64

pHz- HZIP, PISW

99.99994

kHz

1-1

10

ptsldec PIDC, PIOC, PISW

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

-

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

MNEM

RSAU

RSCT

RTN

REVS

ROT

RPM

RPMS

SMPF

SAVD

SAV F

RANGE

0 or

1

alpha

SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

RSAUO

=

fix

RSAUI

=

au

RESLTN AU FIX

RESTOR CATLOG

RETURN

REVS

ROT 90 ON OFF

RPM

RPM (Sec)

SAMPLE FREQ

SAVE DATA#

SAVE FILE

SAVE'STATE#

SAVE RECALL

SAVED 1

SAVED 2

SBAND INCRMT

SBAND ON

SBAND POWER

SCALE

SCALE FREQ

SCALE FREQ

SCROLL ON OFF

Sec

SeclDec

SecIOct

SELECT DATA

RTN

REVS (terminator

only)

0 or

1

ROT0

=

off

ROT1

=

on

RPM (terminator only)

RPMS

1-256 kHz

1 or2

alpha

1-5

KHz, HZ, MHz

RPM, PlRV

SMPFrrrsss

SAVDr

SAVF 'aaaaaaaa'

SAVSr

SAVR

SAVI

SAV2

12.8 pHz

-

100 kHz

KHz, Hz, MHz, RPM,

ORD

SBlNrrrsss

SBND

SPWR

SAVS

SAVR

SAV

1

SAV2

SBlN

SBND

SPWR

SCAL

SCFR

SCLF

SCRL

SEC

SIDC

SlOC

SDAT

SM ES

10k6

10+6

0 or

1

KHz, HZ, MHz

KHz, HZ, MHz

SCFRrrrsss (SYNTH)

SCLFrrrsss (CURVE

FIT)

SCRLO

=

off

SCRLI

=

on

SEC (terminator only)

SlDC (terminator only)

SIOC (terminator only)

SDAT

SMES

.

SELECT MEAS

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the SUFFlX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT PANEL COMMANDS

ommands

gcont)

NAME

SELECT PENS

SELECT TRIG

SELF TEST

SERVCE FCTNS

SET PI LWR LF

SET P2 UPR RT

SINGLE

SINGLE CAL

SLOPE

SLOPE

+

-

SOLID GRIDS

SOLID LINES

SOLIDA DASH B

SOURCE

MNEM

RANGE

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

SPEN

SELT

TST

SVFN

SEPl

SEP2

SNGL

SNGC

SLP

SLOP

SLGR

SLDL

SLDA

SRCE

SRLV

SRLM

SROF

SRON 0 or 1

0-5V

5 mV-5V

V, MV, VRMS,

MVRM, DBV

V,

MV, VRMS,

MVRM, DBV

SPEN

SELT

TST

SVFN

+

32767 SEPl rrr,rrr

SEP2rrr,rrr

SNGL

SNGC

SLP

+

32767

0 or 1 SLOP0

=

off

SLOP1

=

on

SLGR

SLDL

SLDA

SRCE

SRLVrrrsss

SRLMrrrsss

SROF

SRONO

=

off

SRONI

=

on

SOURCE LEVEL

SOURCE LIMIT

SOURCE OFF

SOURCE ON OFF

SOURCE TRIG

SPARE BLOCK SPBL

SPFN

SPMK

SPED

SQRT

STBL

STRT

depends on drive

see Chapter 11 of operating manual

SPBL

SPFN

SPMK

SPCL

FCTN

SPCL MARKER

SPEED F S

SQUARE ROOT

STABLE (MEAN)

START

0 or 1

SPED0

=

slow

SPED1

=

fast

SQRT

STBL

STRT

r

=

value within the range specified in the RANGE column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

.

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

ront

Panel Commaas

NAME

START ASEQ

1

START ASEQ 2

START ASEQ 3

START ASEQ

4

START ASEQ 5

START CAPTU R

START FREQ

MNEM

RANGE

SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

ASQl

ASQ2

ASQ3

ASQ4

ASQ5

STCP

ASQI

ASQ2

ASQ3

ASQ4

ASQ5

STC P

SF

KHz, HZ

99999.97952 MHz, RPM, ORD

Hz

0-

SFrrrsss

(linear res, capture)

SFrrrsss

(log res)

SFrrrsss

(swept sine)

STMA

0.1

HZ-

100

kHz

KHz, HZ

MHz

64 ~Hz- KHz, HZ

99999.99988 MHz, RPM,

Hz ORD

START MATH

START PLOT

START THRU PT

STATE TRACE

STPL

STH R

STTR

STPL

STHR

STTR

STAT

=

state

TRAC

=

trace

SPFT

120 pHz

-

I00

kHz

KHz, HZ,

MHz, RPM, ORD

SPFrrrsss

(swept sine)

STOP FIT

STOP FREQ

STORE WEIGH

SUB

SPFT

SPF

SUB

10*38

TRACE A (TRCA)

TRACE B (TRCB)

SAVED

I

(SAVI)

SAVED

2

(SAV2)

SU Brrr

SU Bsss

SWEEP DOWN

SWEEP HOLD

SWEEP RATE

SWDN

SWHD

SWRT

SWDN

holds the sweep

lO*3*

SIDC, MIDC, SIOC,

MIOC, HIMS, HZIS,

HZlM

SWRTrrrsss (limit

depends on suffix)

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

c

.

olumn

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME MNEM

RANGE

SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

SWEEP UP

SWEPT SINE

SWEPT UNITS

SYNTH

SWUP

SSlN

SWUN

SNTH

SN FT

SNFN

SYSC

GAIN

TT

TBFN

THD

THED

THLN 1-32767 USEC, MSEC, SEC,

MIN, REVS, REC

10+38

SWUP

SSlN

SWUN

SNTH

SN FT

SNFN

SYSC

GAlNrrr

TT

TBFN

TH D

THED

THLNrrrsss (limit is

32767 records; range

depends on suffix)

THRUO

=

off

THRUI

=

on

THSE

1-32767 USEC, MSEC, SEC,

MIN, REVS, REC

THSZrrrsss (limit

is

32767 records; range

depends on suffix)

THTl

SYNTH

-t

FIT

SYNTH FCTN

SYSTEM CNTLR

SYSTEM GAIN

TI1

-

T

TABLE FCTN

THD

THRUPT HEADER

THRUPT LENGTH

THRUPT ON OFF

THRUPT SELECT

THRUPT SIZE

THRU

THSE

THSZ

0 or 1

THRUPTTIME 1 THTl

TICK MARKS

TIM AV ON OFF

TIME BUFFER

TIME CAPTUR

TIME CAPTUR

TIME DELAY

TKMK

TI AV

TMBF

CPTR

TMCP

TMDL

10*38

TKMK

TlAVO

=

off

TlAVl

=

on

TMBF

CPTR

(MEAS

MODE)

TMCP

(PRESET)

USEC, MSEC, SEC TMDLrrrsss

(CURVE

FIT)

r

=

value within the range specified in the RANGE column

the

SUFFlX

column

s

=

one of the suffixesfrom

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix 6-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

TIME DELAY

TIME H,M,S

TIME LENGTH

WINEM

TDLY

TIME

TLN

RANGE

10+38

OO,OO,OO

-

23,59,59

8

ms

-

781 25s

SUFFIXES

USEC, MSEC, SEC

SYNTAX

TDLYrrrsss (SYNVH)

USEC, MSEC, SEC

MIN, REVS

TLNrrrsss

(limit is 781 25s; range

depends on suffix)

TMRl

TMR2

TMRC

TMTH

TIME REC 1

TIME REC 2

TIME RECORD

TIME THRUPT

TIMED PAUSE

TIMED PRVIEW

TIMED START

TMRl

TMR2

TMRC

TMTH

TIPS

TlPR

TlST

0-32767

0- 1 038

OO,OO,OO

24,59,59

SEC

SEC

TlPSrrrSEC

TlPRrrSEC

TlSTrr,rr,rr

(24 hour deactivates

timed start)

TOPR

TOPY

TOPZ

TRCA

TO+POL RESIDU

TO+ POLY

TO+ POL ZERO

TRACE A

TRACE A PEN

TOPR

TOPY

TOPZ

TRCA

TRAP 0-max

TRAPrr (max is

number of pens in

plotter)

TRCB

TRACE

B

TRACE

B

PEN

TRCB

T

plotter

TRACE TITLE

TRIG

DELAY

TRIG LEVEL

UNFIX LINE#

UNIFRM (NONE)

UNITS

UP

ARROW

UPPER LOWER

TlTL

TRGD

TRLV

UFLN

UNlF

UNIT

UP

UPLO

10*38

1-20

V, MV, EUCI, EUC2

alpha TITL'aaaaaa'

TRGD

TRLVrrrrssss (max is

1 OV for ext trigger)

UFLNrr

UNlF

UNlT

UP

U PLO

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

s

=

one of the suffixes from the SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

MNEM

USOR

ULlM

ULlN

UCRR

USDl

USRQ

SRQl

SRQ2

SRQ3

SRQ4

SRQ5

SRQ6

SRQ7

SRQ8

USWT

RANGE

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

USOR

'

USER ORDER

USER LIMITS

USER LINES

USER CRRIER

USER SAVDl

USER SRQ

USER SRQl

USER SRQ2

USER SRQ3

USER SRQ4

USER SRQ5

USER SRQ6

USER SRQ7

USER SRQ8

USER WEIGHT

ULlM

ULlN

current span MHz, HZ, KHz, RPM,

ORD

UCRRrrrsss

USDI

USRQ

SRQI

SRQ2

SRQ3

SRQ4

SRQ5

USWT

v

v

v

(terminator only)

VEU

(terminator only)

VHZ

V2IHZ (PSD)

VWHZ (ESD)

VIEW

VIEW CATLOG

VIEW INPUT

VIEW MATH

VIEW OFF

VIEW WEIGHT

V2HZ

V2SH

VIEW

CAT

VWlN

VWMA

VWOF

VWWT

V2HZ

V2SH

VlEW

CAT

VWlN

VWMA

VWOF

VWWT

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL COMMANDS

NAME

Vrms

VOLTS

VOLTS CHAN 1

VOLTS CHAN 2

VOLTS PEAK

VOLTS RMS

WEIGHT REGION

WEIGHT VALUE

WINDOW

MMEM

VRMS

V LTS

VLTI

RANGE

SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

VRMS

(terminator only)

VLTS

VLTl

VLT2

VTP

K

VTRM

WTRG

WTVL

WNDO

see comment

0-100 kHz

10+38

.

KHz, HZ, MHz

VTPK

VTRM

WTRGrrrsss

WTVLrrr

WNDO

Xrrrsss (entry optional;

range and suffix

depend on current

display)

XASC

XFOF

see comment

XSCLrrrsss

XSCLrrr,rrrsss (range

and suffix depend on

current display)

X AUTO SCALE

X FCTN OFF

X FlXD SCALE

X ASC

XFOF

XSCL

X MRKR SCALE

,

XMKR

XOFF

XVAL see comment

XOFF

XVALrrrsss

XVALrrr, rrrsss

(range and suffix

display)

X

OFF

X VALUE

-depenhWrrent

Y

Y see comment

Yrrrsss (entry optional;

range and suffix

depend on current

display)

YASC

YDSC

see comment

YSCLrrrsss

YSCLrrr,rrrsss

(range and suffix

depend on current

display)

-

Y AUTO SCALE

Y DFLT SCALE

Y FlXD SCALE

YASC

Y DSC

YSCL

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference

Guide

FRONT PANEL COMMANDS

NAME

MNEM

RANGE

SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

Y MRKR SCALE

Y

OFF

Y VALUE

YMKR

YOFF

YVAL see comment

YMKR

YOFF

YVALrrrsss

WALrrr,rrrsss

(range and suffix

depend on current

display)

YES

ZERO START

Use ACPT in place of YES when previewing over the bus.

ZST ZST

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

6-Quick Reference

Guide

.

BUS-ONLY

COMMANDS

COMMAND

Add Block

MNEM

ADDB

SYNTAXIDATA FORMAT

ADDBnl ,n2[,n3]

Adds block nl to n2 and puts the result in n3. If n3

is not specified the result is put in n2.

ADDXnl ,n2,n3[,n4]

Adds complex constant nl

, n2 to block n3 (nl is

the real part and n2 is the imaginary part). The

result is put in n4 is specified, n3 if not.

ADDCnl ,n2[,n3]

Adds constant nl to real block n2 and puts the

result in n3. If n3 is not specified the result put in n2.

AS?

Returns contents of activity status register

ASM H n

Where n

=

decimal equivalent of sum of bits to be

unmasked. See table 7.

ASMLn

Where n

=

decimal equivalent of sum of bits to be

unmasked. See table 7.

BRlTn

Where values for n are:

0 =trace off

1

=dim

2 =half bright

3 =full bright (default)

BLSZ size,nl [,count]

Size is limited to 37 900 words

nl is first buffer (0 to 15)

Add Complex Constant to Block ADDX

Add Real Constant to Block ADDC

Activity Status Query

Activity Status Mask High

AS?

ASMH

Activity Status Mask Low ASM L

Brightness BRIT

Block Size BLSZ

Character Rotation CHRO CHROn

Where values of n are:

0

= O0

(default)

1 =90°

2= 180°

3

=

270°

CHSZn

Where values of n are:

0

=

24 x 36 points (default)

1 =36x54

2=48x72

3=60x90

CLBFn

Wheren

=

-4to15

Character Size CHSZ

Clear Buffer

CLEF

[ ]

indicates

optional

parameter

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY COWihlANDS

COMMAND

Command Echo Disable

Command Echo Enable

Complex Fast Fourier Transform

MNEM SPINTAXIDATA FORMAT

COM D

COME

CFFT

COMD

COME

CFFTnl ,n2

Performs FFT on complex block nl and puts

results in n2.

CFTI nl ,n2

Performs inverse FFT on complex block nl and

puts results in n2.

CNJBnl [,n2]

Computes the complex conjugate of complex

block nl and puts results in n2. If n2 is not specified

.

the results are put in nl

CTADn

Where n

=

0

to 31

CXAVnl ,n2,n3,awf

Computes cross spectrum of complex floating

point blocks nl and n2 and exponentially averages

it with complex floating point block n3. awf is the

average weighting factor (a power of two); Result is

put in block n3.

CPEKnl ,n2,n3

Computes cross spectrum of complex floating

point blocks nl and n2 and compares magnitudes

of result with complex block n3. The larger values

are put in n3.

CSPSnl ,n2,n3

Computes cross spectrum of complex floating

point blocks nl and n2 and adds it to complex

floating point block n3, puts results in n3.

Used as an exponent indicator in scientif~c notation,

DlFBnl [,n2]

Computes differential of block nl and puts result in

.

n2. If n2 is not specified result is put in nl

DSWQ

DSP'aaa

...

aaa'

(max 24 characters)

DBSZsize,n 1[ ,count]

Size is number of words in each buffer; nl is the

first buffer; count is the number buffers. If count is

not specified, one block is configured.

DSP?

Returns display message, up to

24

characters

Complex Inverse Fast

Fourier Transform

Conjugate Block

CFTI

CNJB

Controller Address

Cross Spectrum

Exponential Average

CTAD

CXAV

Cross Spectrum Peak Hold CPEK

Cross Spectrum Summation CSPS

D

(exponent image specifier) D

DlFB Differentiate Block

Disable Sweep SRQ

Display

Display Buffer Size

DSWQ

DSP

.

DBSZ

Display Query

[ ] indicates

optional

parameter

DSP?

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY

COMMANDS

Display Buffer Active Append

Display Buffer Active Clear

Display Buffer Switch

DBAA

DBAC

DBSW

DBAAn

Where n is the buffer to be activated

DBAC n

Where n is the buffer to be cleared and activated

DBSWnl ,n2

Where nl is the currently displayed buffer, and n2

is the buffer to be displayed

DBDNn

Where n is te buffer to be taken down

DBUPr:

Where n is the buffer to be put up

DSPD

DSPE

DlVBnl ,n2[,n3]

Divides block n2 by nl and puts results in n3. If n3

is not specified, result is put in n2.

DIVCnl ,n2[,n3]

Divides block n2 by constant nl and puts results in

n3. If n3 is not specified, results are put in

n2.-

DVJWw

,,

Aw

,nl [,n2]

Divides complex block nl by jo and puts results in

.

n2. If n2 is not specified, results are put into nl

o, ,,

is the floating point starting value of

o

and

Ao

'

is the incremental value of

w.

Display Buffer Down

Display Buffer Up

Display Disable

Display Enable

Divide Block

DBDN

DBUP

.DSPD

DSPE

DlVB

Divide Block into Real Constant DVlC

Divide Block by jo DVJW

Divide Imaginary Part DlVl DIVlnl ,n2[,n3]

Divides the imaginary part of complex floating point

block nl by real constant n2 and puts result in n3. If

n3 is not specified, result is put in nl

.

puts the results in n4. If n4 is not specified the

results are put in nl. nl may be a real or complex

block. Dividing a real block by a complex number

requires a destination block twice the size of the

real (source) block.

Divide By Constant DlVC DVICnl ,n2[,n3]

Divides block nl by constant n2 and puts results in

.

n3. If n3 is not specified, results are put in nl

DIVRnl ,n2[,n3]

Divides real part of complex floating point block nl

by real constant n2 and puts result in n3. If n3 is not

specified, result is put in nl.

Divide Real Part DlVR

[ ]

indicates

optional

parameter

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY

COMMANDS

COMMAND MMEM SYMPAXIBATA FORMAT

Dump Block in ANSI Binary

Dump Block in ASCII

Dump Block in Internal Binary

DBAN

DBAS

DBBN

DBAN

Dumps primitive block PBLKn in ANSl format.

DBAS

Dumps primitive block PBLKn in ASCII format

DBBN

Dumps primitive block PBLKn in internal binary

format.

DCAN

Dumps coordinate transform block in ANSI format.

DCAS

Dumps coordinate transform block in ASCll format.

DCBN

Dumps coordinate transform block in internal bin-

ary format.

DDAN

Dumps active trace in ANSl format.

DDAS

Dumps active trace in ASCll format.

DDBN

Dumps active trace in internal binary format.

DSAN

Dumps state in ANSl format.

DSAS

Dumps state in ASCII format.

DSBN

Dumps state in internal binary format.

DTAN

-

Dump Coordinate Transform

Block in ANSI Binary

Dump Coordinate Transform

Block in ASCll

Dump Coordinate Transform

Block in lnternal Binary

Dump Data in ANSl Binary

Dump Data in ASCII

Dump Data in lnternal Binary

Dump State in ANSl Binary

Dump State in ASCII

Dump State in Internal Binary

Dump Table in ANSI Binary

DCAN

DCAS

DCBN

DDAN

DDAS

DDBN

DSAN

DSAS

DSBN

DTAN

u

IAS

,mrv

Dump Table in Internal Binary

Dump Vector Display Buffer in

ANSI Binary

Dump Vector Display Buffer in

ASCII

Dump Vector Display Buffer in

Internal Binary

DTBN

DVAN

Dumps synthlcurve fit table in ASCII.

DTBN

Dumps synthlcurve fit table in internal binary.

DVAN

Dumps vector display buffer VBLKn in ANSI

format.

DVAS

Dumps vector display buffer VBLKn in ASCII

format.

DVBN

Dumps vector display buffer VBLKn in internal bin-

ary format.

DVAS

DVBN

[ ] indicates

optional

parameter

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

8-Quick

Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY COMMANDS

COMMAND

MNEM

ESWQ

ERR?

ERRD

ERRE

XAVG

SYNTAXlDATA

FORMAT

Enable Sweep SRQ

Error Code Query

Error SRQ Disable

Error SRQ Enable

Exponential Average

ESWQ

ERR?

Returns error code; refer to table

8

for description.

ERRD

ERRE

XAVGnl ,n2,awf

Exponentially averages nl with n2 and puts the

results in n2. awf is the average weighting factor (a

power of two).

FLTBnl ,n2

[,

count]

Converts integers'in block nl to floating point (real)

and puts results in n2. Count is optional point

count.

GRBLn,x,Ax

Where n is active buffer x is starting location Ax is

increment.

GRIMn,x,Ax

Where n is active buffer x is starting location Ax is

increment.

GRREn,x,Ax

Where n is active buffer x is starting location Ax is

increment.

HSTnl ,n2,vmax

nl contains the new input data, n2 is the histogram

count block, and vmax in the maximum absolute

amplitude range for nl

.

LOGO0

=

logo off for plots

LOGO1

=

logo on for plots

Float Block FLTB

Graph Real Block

GRBL

Graph Imaginary Part of

Complex Block

GRIM

Graph Real Part of Complex Block GRRE

Histogram HST

HP Logo LOGO

Identify

Instrument Status

Instrument Status Mask

ID?

IS?

ISM

ID?

outputs -/-character string "HP3562An

IS?

Returns instrument status register contents.

lSMn

where n is decimal equivalent of sum of bits to be

unmasked.

INGBnl [,n2]

Integrates nl and puts result in n2. If n2 is not

specified, result is put in nl.

KEYnn

Where nn is key code from

0

to 70.

Integrate Block INGB

Key Press Simulation

[

]

indicates

optional

parameter

KEY

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix 6-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY

COMMANDS

COMMAND

Key Press Query

Key Press SRQ Disable

Key Press SRQ Enable

L (long exponent imag specifier)

Label User SRQs One through

Eight

MNEM

KEY?

KEYD

KEYE

L

LBSI

LBS2

LBS3

SYNTAXIDATA FORMAT

KEY?

Returns key code of last key pressed.

KEYD

KEY

E

Used in scientific notation as an exponent indicator,

as is "E" and "D".

LBSn'aaaaaa[,bbbbbbI1

Where n is softkey number, aaaaaa is top line,

bbbbbb is bottom line LBS8

Line Type

LT LTn

Where values for n are:

0

=

solid lines (default)

1 =solid lines with endpoints

2

=

long dashes

3

=short dashes.

LBAN

Loads primitive block PBLKn in ANSl format.

LBAS

Loads primitive block PBLKn in ASCII format.

LBBN

Loads primitive block PBLKn in internal binary

format.

LDAN

Loads active trace in ANSl format

LDAS

Loads active trace ~n ASCll format.

lN

p

Loads active trace in internal binary format.

LSAN

Loads state in ANSl format.

LSAS

Loads state in ASCll format.

LSBN

Loads state in internal binary format.

LTAN

Loads synthlcurve fit table in ANSl format.

LTAS

Loads synthlcurve fit table in ASCll format.

--

Load Block in ANSI Binary

Load Block in ASCII

Load Block in Internal Binary

LBAN

LBAS

LBBN

Load Data in ANSI Binary

Load Data in ASCII

LDAN

LDAS

L

-

oa3lXEEI~~t

Load State in ANSI Binary

Load State in ASCII

Load State in Internal Binary

Load Table in ANSI Binary

Load Table in ASCII

LSAN

LSAS

LSBN

LTAN

LTAS

[

]

indicates

optional

parameter

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY

COMMANDS

COMMAND MNEM SYNTAXIDATA

FORMAT

Load Table in Internal Binary

LTBN

LTBN

Loads synthlcurve fit table in Internal binary format.

LUAN

Loads active user display buffer in ANSl format.

LUAS

Loads active user display buffer in ASCll format.

LUBN

Loads active user display buffer in internal binary

format.

MOVBnl ,n2[,count]

Moves nl to n2. Optional count is used to move

partial blocks.

MOVXnl ,n2,n3

[, count]

Moves complex number nl ,n2 (realjmag) into

complex block n3.

MOVCnl ,n2[,count]

Moves real constant nl into n2. Optional count

moves partial blocks.

MPYBnl ,n2[,n3]

Multiplies nl by n2 and puts results in n3. If n3 is

not specified, results are put in n2.

MPYXnl ,n2,n3[,n4]

Multiplies complex block n3 by complex constant

,n2 (realhag). Result is put in n4 if specified, n3 nl

otherwise.

MPYCnl ,n2[,n3]

Multipl~es n2 by constant nl and puts result in n3 is

specifled, n2 otherwise.

MPJWo,,,A o,nl [,n2]

Multiplies nl by jw and puts result in n2 if specif~ed,

nl if not.

,,a,

is the floating point starting value

and Aa is the incremental value of

o.

MPMGnl ,n2[,n3]

multiplies real floating point block nl by the magni-

tude squared of the complex floating point block n2

and puts the result in n3 if specified, nl if not.

MPSC nl [,n2];

Multiplies nl by complex conjugate of nl and puts

the result in n2 if specified, nl if not.

NEGB nl [,n2];

Negates nl and puts result in n2 if specified, nl if

not.

PCLRnl ,n

Clears the first n points in nl

.

Load User Display in ANSl Binary LUAN

Load User Display in ASCII

Load User Display in Internal

Binary

Move Block

LUAS

LUBN

MOVB

Move Complex M OVX

Move Constant M OVC

Multiply Blocks MPYB

Multiply Block by Complex

Constant

MPYX

Multiply Block by Real Constant MPYC

Multiply Block by jo MPJW

--

Multiply Block by Magnitude

Squared

MPMG

Multiply Block by Self Conjugate MPSC

Negate Block NEGB

Partial Block Clear PCLR

[ ] indicates

.optional

parameter

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY COMMANDS

COMMAND

Pause

Peak Hold

MNEM

SYMTAWDATA FORMAT

PKHD PKHDnl ,n2

Compares values in blocks nl and n2 and puts

larger values in n2.

PD

PU

~Ax,Y

Where

x

is X-axis location; y is Y-axis location.

PCBLnl

Converts complex floating point block nl to display

format and puts it in the active display buffer.

PRBLnl

,

n2

Converts real floating point block nl vs. n2 to dis-

play format and puts it in the active buffer.

PRKY

Where

x

is relative X-axis location, y is relative Y-axis

'location.

PTCTnl,n2

Where nl is block number, n2 is number of points.

Pen Down

Pen Up

Plot Absolute

Plot Complex Block

PD

PU

PA

PCBL

Plot Real Block PRBL

Plot Relative PR

Point Count

Power Spectrum Exponential

Average

PTCT

PXAV

.

PXAVnl,n2,awf

Computes power spectrum of the complex floating

point block nl and exponentially averages it with

real floating point block n2. awf is the average

weighting factor (a power of two).

PPEKnl ,n2

Computes power spectrum of nl and compares

the magnitudes of the result with real block n2, put-

ting the larger values in n2.

Power Spectrum Peak Hold PPEK

Power Spectrum Summation

-,-

PSPS PSPS nl

,

n2;

dmptltwpo~~~I&Img

point block nl and adds it to the real floating point

block n2. The result is put into n2.

--

-.

Primitive Block Number

Read Marker

PBLK

RDMK

PBLKnl

Where nl is the primitive block number,

0

to 31.

RDMK

Outputs 2 ASCII values, X-axis value then Y-axis

value.

RSMO

See Chapter

6

RSMG

See Chapter

6

Read Special Marker Once

Read Special Marker Group

RSMO

RSMG

[

] indicates

optional

parameter

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY COMMANDS

COMMAND

Ready Query

Ready Bit Disable

~ead; Bit Enable

Real Fast Fourier Transform

Real Inverse Fast Fourier

Transform

Reject

Remote Entry Disable

Remote Entry Enable

Remote Entry Speed

MNEM

R DY?

RDYD

RDYE

RFFT

RFTI

SYMTAXIDATB FORMAT

R DY?

Always returns "1"

RDYD

RDYE

RFFTnl,n2

Performs real FFT on nl and puts result in n2.

RFTl nl ,n2

Performs real inverse FFT on nl and puts result in

n2.

REJT

REND

RENE

RENSn, max

for constant accelaration,

>

1 for vari- where

n

is

0

able accelaration. Max is maximum entry velocity.

RENVn

where n is value

RMKD

RMKE

RMKVn

where n is value

RST

REV?

Outputs software revision date code and the revi-

of the appl~cable codes and format doc-

o which the software was designed.

SACR

Returns

4

values: Auto carrier

I

Auto cqrrier 2

Phase offset 1

Phase offset 2

SMSD

Returns a "1" if measurement is done,

"0"

if not

SMSP

Returns a

"1"

if sample was missed;

"0"

if not

SOVl

if not

Returns 1 if over range,

0

SOV2

if not

Returns 1 if over range,

0

REJT

-

REND

RENE

RENS

Remote Entry Value

Remote Marker Disable

Remote Marker Enable

Remote Marker Value

Reset

Revision

RENV

RMKD

RMKE

RMKV

RST

REV?

--

Send Auto Carrier

SACR

Send Measurement Done

Send Missed Sample

SMSD

SMSP

Send Overflow Status Channel 1 SOVl

Send Overflow Status Channel 2 SOV2

[ ] indicates

.

optional

parameter

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY

COMMANDS

COMMAND

Send Reference Locked

MNEM

RLOK

SYNTAXIBATA

FORMAT

RLOK

Returns a "1

"

if locked; "0" if trying to lock

externally.

SFLT

Returns 1 if source fault.

SSWP

Returns five values:

Input power

Output power

Cross spectrum real

Cross spectrum imaginary

Frequency

First 4 are real; frequency is long real

SER?

Outputs a 10-character string: serial number prefix

(4

integers), country of origin (1 letter) and

5

zeros.

SET

Loads instrument state; interchangeable with

LSAN.

SET?

Dumps instrument state; interchangeable with

DSAN.

SRQD

SRQE

STAT

STA?

See Chapter

6

SUBBnl ,n2[,n3]

Subtracts n2 from nl and puts result in n3 ~f spec-

ified, n2 otherwise.

SUBXnl ,n2,n3[, n4]

suwracts complex constant nl ,n2 (realjmag)

from

n3 and stores it in n4 if specified, n3 otherwise.

SUBCnl ,n2[,n3]

Subtracts nl from n2 and stores result in n3 if spec-

ified, n2 otherwise.

TMOE

TMOD

UFLBnl ,n2[,count]

Converts floating point block nl to integers and

puts result in n2. Optional count partially unfloats nl.

Poiqts to vector display buffer to be dumped with

DVAN, DVAS, DVBN.

WRIT'aaaaaa' where aaaaaa are alphanumeric

characters.

XAVG nl

,

n2, awl

See Chapter

6.

Send Source Fault

Send Sweep Point

SFLT

SSW

P

Serial Number Query SER?

Setup State

SET

Setup State Query

SET?

SRQ Disable

SRQ Enable

State

StatuslEvent Query

Subtract Block

SRQE

SRQD

STAT

STA?

SUBB

Subtract Complex Constant SUBX

Subtract Real Constant SU BC

Time-out enable

Time-out disable

Unfloat Block

TMOE

TMOD

UFLB

Vector Display Buffer

Write Text

Exponential averaging

B-36

VBLK

WRIT

XAVG

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference

STATUSBYTE

Guide

Table

2

shows the eight bits in the HP 3562A's status byte. The statusbyte is read by serial

polling the analyzer (which also clears the status byte). Five of these bits are encoded; refer to

table 3 for the condition codes. Chapter

6

provides complete explanations of the status byte

conditions.

Table

2

The

HP

3562A's

Status

Byte

Bit

Value

Description

see table 3

RQS

(HP 3562A requested service)

ERR

(HP-IB error)

RDY

(ready to accept HP-IB commands)

see table

3

see table

3

see table 3

see table 3

Bit

6

(RQS) is set when the HP 3562A sends an SRQ. Bit

5

(ERR) is set when an HP-IB error

commands. has been made. Bit

4

(RDY) is set when the analyzer is ready to receive HP-IB

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

STATUS BYTE

Table

3

shows the condition codes represented

by

bits 7,

3,

2,1

and

0

in the status byte.

Table

3

Status Byte

Condition Codes

Status

bit

Numbers

73210

Status

Byte

Value

0

1

2

3

4

001 01

00110

001 11

01 000

01001

01010

01 01 1

01 100

01 101

01110

01111

10000

10001

1001 0

1001 1

101 00

10101

10110

10111

11 000

11 001

11010

5

6

7

8

9

10

1 1

12

13

14

1.5

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

Description

No service requested

UserSRQ#I

UserSRQ#2

UserSRQ#3

UserSRQ#4

UserSRQ#5

UserSRQ#6

UserSRQ#7

UserSRQ#8

End of disc action

End of plot action

Instrument status change

Powerup

Key pressed

Device Clear Plotter, Listen HP 3562A

Unaddress Bus, Listen HP 3562A

Talk plotter, Listen HP '3562A

Talk disc execution. Listen HP 3562A

Talk disc report, Listen HP 3562A

Talk Amigo disc command, Listen HP 3562A

Talk Amigo disc data, Listen HP 3562A

Talk Amigo short status, Listen HP 3562A

Talk disc identify, Listen HP 3562A

Talk Amigo parallel poll, Listen HP 3562A

Listen Plotter, Talk HP 3562A

l&Qzid=

11100

11 101

11110

11111

137 Listen disc command, Talk HP 3562A

138 Listen disc execution, Talk HP 3562A

B9diste~-Acnigo;dis@wmma1?~lldS

P-3-SW?,

140 Listen Amigo disc data, Talk HP 3562A

141 Listen Amigo disc read, Talk HP 3562A

142

143

Listen Amigo disc write, Talk HP 3562A

Listen Arnigo disc format, Talk HP 3562A

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

STATUS

BYTE

Conditions

in

the

Status

When a condition is "masked," it is prevented from generating an SRQ when it becomes true.

Table

4

shows how to mask the status byte conditions that can be masked. Conditions that

cannot be masked are noted as well.

Table

4

Masking Status Byte Conditions

Condition

How

to

Mask

not maskable (never generates an SRQ)

not maskable

unmasked with SRQE; masked with SRQD

unmasked with ISMn, where n is decimal equivalent of the bits in

the IS register to be unmasked. This bit is completely masked by

sending ISMO.

masked with PSRQO; unmasked with PSRQl

masked with KEYD; unmasked with KEYE

not maskable.

SRQs are generated only by the status byte; the instrument status (IS) and activity status (AS)

registers must generate SRQs indirectly through the status byte. The IS register can generate

an SRQ if condition

11

in the status byte is enabled. The

AS

register is twice removed: bit

13

of

11

of the status byte must be enabled for the

AS

to generate an the IS register and condition

SRQ. Chapter

6

has all the details.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

THE

INSTRUMENT STATUS REGISTER

Table

5

shows the instrument status (IS) register. The contents of the IS are read by sending the

IS? command (which also clears the register). Unlike the status byte, the IS is not encoded:

each bit represents a single condition. Complete information on the IS register is provided in

Chapter 6. Remember that bit

11

in the status byte must be enabled (unmasked) before the IS

can indirectly generate an SRQ.

Table

5

Instrument Status Register

Bit

Condition

Measurement pause

Autosequence pause

End of measurement

End of autosequence

Sweep point ready

Channel

1

over range

Channel

2

over range

Channel

1

half range

Channel

2

half range

Source fault

Reference unlocked

Remote marker knob turn

Remote entry knob turn

Activity status register change

Power-on test failed

Bits in the IS are masked with the lSMn command, where n is the decimal equivalent of the

sum of the values of the bits to be unmasked. For example, ISM20 enables (unmasks) bit 2

(value

=

4)

and bit

4

(value =16). All other bits are masked.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

8-Quick

Reference Guide

THE INSTRUMENT ER

The status query command

(STA?)

provides some information from both the status byte and

the instrument status register. Sending

STA?

causes the

HP

3562A to return the 16-bit word

shown in table

6.

Table

6

The STA?

Word

Bit

Value

Not used

Not used

Key pressed

Not used

R

DY

ERR

RQS

Message on screen

Measurement pause

Auto sequence pause

End of measurement

End of auto sequence

Sweep point ready

Channel

1

over range

Channel

2

over range

Not used

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

THE

ACTIVITY STATUS

REGiSTER

Table

7

shows the activity status (AS) register. The contents of the AS are read by sending the

AS? command (which does not clear the register). Unlike the status byte and like the IS, the AS

is not encoded: each bit represents a single condition. Complete information on the AS register

is provided in Chapter

6.

Remember that both bit

13

of the IS and condition

11

of the status byte

must be enabled before the AS can indirectly generate an SRQ.

Table

7

Activity Status

Register

Bit

0

Value

Condition

I

1

2

4

8

2

3

4

16

Check fault log

Filling time record

Filters settling

Curve fit in progress

Missed sample

Time preview

Accept data

Waiting for trigger

Waiting for arm

Not

used

Ramping Source

Diagnostic in Progress

Marker Calc

in

Progress

Bits in the AS are masked with the ASMLn and ASMHn commands, where n is the decimal

equivalent of the sum of the values of the bits to be unmasked. ASML unmasks for the nega-

tive-going transition; ASMH unmasks for the positive-going transition.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

ERROR

CODES

The Error query

(ERR?)

causes the analyzer to return the error code of the last

HP-IB

error.

Each error code has a corresponding description in table

8.

Note that these are the same

errors as those encountered

in

front panel operation. For complete descriptions, with sug-

gested corrective actions, refer to Appendix

B

of the

UP

3562A

Operating

Manual.

Table

8

Error Codes

Code

Error

No Peak Avg in HlST Meas

No Peak Avg in CORR Meas

Freq Resp, No

1

Ch Demod

Cross Corr, No 1 Ch Demod

No Fundamental

Code Error

View lnput Disabled

Cannot Use Zoom Data

Already Running

May Be Inaccurate

Cannot Be Comdex

Bad Delete Freq Table

Loops Nested Too Deep

Demod In Zoom Only

Numeric Overflow

Invalid: NyquisffNichols

Invalid: Log Data

No Carrier

No Peak Hold in Time Avg

Calibration in Progress

No Avg For Demod Hist

Not Active Softkey

Unknown Mnemonic

Line Too Long

Command Too Long

Alpha Delimiter Expected

Not A Valid Terminator

Extra Chars In Command

Function Inactive

Missing lnput

301

302

303

304

305

306

307

308

309

Not Valid Units

Not A Valid Number

Alpha Too Long

Number Too Long

Out Of Range

Unable To Curve Fit

Bad

# Of Parameters

Auto Carrier Selected

ENTRY Not Enabled

Code Error

400

401

402

403

500

600

601

602

603

604

605

606

607

608

609

610

611

612

613

614

615

616

617

618

~-

620

X

Marker Must Be Active

Buffer Overflow

No Coord Change Allowed

Not In Frequency Domain

No Data

Measurement In Progress

Trace Not Compatible

Data Type Incompatible

Data Blocks Incompatible

Source Block Empty

User Display Not Enabled

No Active Display Buffer

Recursive Call

Not A Valid Auto Math

Bad Setup State

Bad Auto Sequence Table

Bad Synth Table

State Bad Non-Volat~le

Bad Data Block

1+&&ZJ&a,-#=+r-

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

Marker Not On

No Valid Marker Units

No Capture Data

No Thruput Data

Thruput DataToo Long

Bad Curve Fit Table

Bad Capture

Bad Thruput

Not A Valid User Window

Bad Primitive Block

Not A Valid Block Length

Not A Valid Block Mode

Not HP-IB Controller

HP-IB Time Out

Bad Plotter Data Read

Cannot Recall Throughput

Not

A

Valid Catalog

Unformatted Disc

Catalog Full

Not A Valid Name

Not A Valid Display

File Not Found

Disc Full

Disc Reject

Recall Active Auto Seq

Unknown Disc Command Set

No Disc In Drive

Disc Write Protected

Disc Fault

Disc Transfer Error

No Spares Or Fault Areas

No Thruput File

Catalog Not In Memory

File Size Not Specified

&aleet=&p&+&&+m[~~

Source

=

Destination

621

622

623

624

Sector Size

< >

256 Bytes

Not Valid Format Option

Not Valid For This Disc

Destination Too Small

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix 6-Quick Reference Guide

KEY

CODES

Table

8

lists the

HP

3562A's key codes. Note that the eight softkey buttons have unique codes,

but individual softkey labels do not. The code of the last key pressed (since power-up or reset)

is returned by the KEY? command. Key presses are simulated by sending the analyzer the

KEYn command, where n is the code of the key to be simulated.

Table

8

Key

Codes

Key Name

No Key Pressed

ENGR UNITS

INPUT COUPLE

TRIG DELAY

HP-IB FCTN

DISC

SELECT TRIG

CAL

RANGE

AVG

SELECT MEAS

WINDOW

LOCAL

PLOT

SOURCE

FREQ

MEAS MODE

START

SPCL FCTN

PRESET

MATH

Code

Key Name

Code

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

Softkey

4

Softkey

5

Softkey

2

Softkey

I

(top)

Softkey

3

36

37

38

39

40

4

1

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

5 1

52

53

54

55

5

6

4

Softkey

7

Softkey

6

1

3

2

MARKER VALUE

-

(negative sign)

BACKSPACE

Softkey

8

(bottom)

VIEW INPUT

0

,

(comma)

SAVE RECALL

Y (marker

>

SPCL MARKER

HELP

AUTO MATH

CURVE FIT

X OFF

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

3

1

32

33

34

35

A&B

COORD

MEAS DlSP

ARM

SINGLE

UPPER LOWER

STATE TRACE

UNITS

FRONT BACK

SCALE

UP arrow

DOWN arrow

6 1

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

X

Y OFF

8

9

7

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

This appendix contains example HP BASIC 3.0 programs written for for the HP 3562A. These

programs were written to provide you with with ideas for controlling the HP 3562A via HP-IB.

They are not intended to be final solutions to any particular programming problems, but rather

to demonstrate the analyzer's power and flexibility.

NOTE

These programs are not warranted, guaranteed, or sup-

ported by Hewlett-Packard or any of its representatives in any

manner whatsoever.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

1

!

APPENDIX

C

EXAMPLE PROGRAM

1

.............................................................

-

!

!

DEMO PROGRAM PASS CONTROL

!

!

(c)

COPYRIGHT 1985, Hewlett-Packard Co.

!

!

!

!

!

!

last update 4-23-85

BASIC

3.0

PURPOSE:

This program responds to a request for sevice by

the HP3562A so that it can make direct digital

plots, etc., while attached to

a

Series 200

controller by passing control to the analyzer.

!

!

!

DATA DICTIONARY:

!

!

!

Spoll-byte Masked serial poll byte

!

!

@I0 HP-'IB code assignment of the

$562

!

!

Hpib-intr HPIB interupt service routine

!

!

..............................................................

!

-

Lm-M1J-T-hlT-R_7-~~~~--b+=wt

-

6.

ASSIGN @I0 TO 720

LOCAL @Io

--

-..

320 ENABLE INTR

7;2

330

!

340 W-1oop:GOTO W-loop

!

Wait for interupt

350

!

360

Hpib-intr:

!

Pass control interrupt service routine

370

Spoll-byte=B1NAND(SP0LL(@I0~~143)!

MASK OUT BITS

4,5,6

380

IF Spoll_byte>=14 AND Spoll_byte<=l43 THEN

390 SEND 7;UNL UNT TALK

20

CMD

9

400 GOT0 End-intr

410

END IF

420 End-intr:ENABLE INTR

7

430

RETURN

440 END

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

2

!

APPENDIX

C

-

EXAMPLE

PROGRAM

2

...........................................................

!

!

DEMO PROGRAM DUMP DATA TRACE

!

!

(c)

COPYRIGHT

1985,

Hewlett-Packard Co.

1

last updated 4-23-85

!

BASIC

3.0

!

!

!

PURPOSE:

!

!

This program will read data directly from a

!

HP3562A analyzer over the HP-IE bus

!

using the capability of the series 200.

1

!

!

!

!

DATA DICTIUNARY:

!

!

Max-val(*) The data array wax and/or win value used

!

Min-val(+) in determining the plotting

limit.

!

!

Header-len Data header length (constant)

The data is assumed to be linear

resolution data and is plotted;

if

complex,

in real and imag formats.

!

!

!

!

Data-len

N-points

Start-f

Delta-f

Hbuft*)

Data buffer length (bytes)

Number of data points

Start frequency

Frequency or time spacing

Real buffer containing data header

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

Fbuf(*) Real buffer containing data 'trace

!

...........................................................

!

INTEGER 1,Real ,Imag,Mag,Phase

,Plln_val(

1

:2)

DIM A$C21 ,Max-val(

1

:2)

Real=l

Imag=2

GINIT

!

Header_len=66

ASSIGN @Io TO 720

REMOTE @Io

!

!

GET

DATA

I

.

.

!

Data header length

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

2

DISP "DUMP DATA"

OUTPUT @Io;"DDANM

!

Dump data ANSI format

ENTER @Io USING "#,ZA,W";A$,Data-len

ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT OFF

!

Turn ASCII formatter off

RLLOCATE REAL Hbuf(1:Header-len)

ENTER @Io;Hhuf(

*

)

!

Read data header

!

!

EXTRACT HEADER INFORMATION

!

N_points=Hbuf(2) !Number of data points

Cmplx-f lg=Hbuf (37 !Complex data flag

Start-f=Hbuf

(

66

)

!Data start frequency

Delta-f=Hbuf (56

)

!Uelta frequency or time

IF

Cmplx-flg=l THEN

1

:N-points ,l:2

)

ALLOCATE Fbuf(

ELSE

ALLOCATE Fbuf

(

1

:N-points

,l

:

1

)

END IF

l

*

)

!Read data trace ENTER @Io; Fhuf

ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT ON

DISP "DATH TRANSFER COMPLETE"

!

!FIND MAX VALUE

j

DISP "FINDING

MAX

MIN FOR PLOT"

790 Max-min: !Calculates the MAX and

MIN

for plotting

es

800 !Initialize Uariabl

810 Max-val(Rea1 !=0

!

Real trace Max

820 Max-val( Imag

)=0

!

Imag trace Max

830 Min-val (Real )=0

!

Real trace Min

840 Min-val( Imaq

)=@!

!

Imag trace Min

!

Find Max's and Min's

850 FOR 1=1 TO N-points

860

FOR J=l TO Cmplx-f lgtl

870

IF

Fbuf(1,J);Max-val(J) THEN Max-val(J)=Fbuf(I,J)

880

IF Fbuf

(

I

,J

)

,J

)

iF30YEiii

J

--

900 NEXT

I

910 Plot-out:

!

Plots data

GCLEAR

GRAPHICS ON

X-min=Start-f

X-max=(N-points-1 )*Delta-f+Start-f

ALPHH OFF

FOR K-funct='t TO Cmplx-flgtl

IF Cmplxlflg=0 THEN

l0,15,85

VIEWPORT

10,1

ELSE

VIEWPORT 10,110,15,48

END IF

IF K-func t=2 THEN VIEWPORT 10,110,53,85

)

,Max-val(K_func

)!

WINDOW X-min,X-max ,Min-val(K_funct

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

2

1058

MOVEStart-f,Fbuf(l,K-funct!

1060

FOR

1=2TON_points

1070

PLOT

Start-ft(

I*Del

ta-f

,Fbuf

I

,KKfunct

f

1080

NEXT

I

1090

NEXT

M-funct

1100

!

1110 Border:

!

Plots border around data

1120

VIEWPORT

10,110,10,90

1130

WINDOW

0,1000,0,1000

11

48

MOVE

0,500

1150

DRAW

0,1800

1

160

PLOT

1

08@, 1000

1

170

PLOT

1

800,500

1 180

PLOT

0,508

1196

PLOT

0,0

l2OB

PLOT

1008 ,0

1210

PLOT

1600 ,SUB

1220

!

1230

DISP

""

1240

LOCAL

@Io

1250

END

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

3

!

APPENDIX

C -

EXAMPLE PROGRAM

3

...........................................................

DEMO PROGRAM 1/3 RD OCTAVE

(c) COPYWRIGHT 1985, Hewlett-Packard Co.

last update 4-23-85

BASIC

3.0

PURPOSE:

This program will read data directly from a

HP3562A analyzer over the HP-IB of the

HP9000

Series

200

controller.

The data is assumed to be in Log res

mod

and

amplitude units of vlt"2

it

is

converted to

a

psuedo 1/3 octave format and dumped back

to 3562A analyzer.

SUB REQUIRED:

F-s hape Computes the ANSI class 111 filter shape

DATA DICTIONARY:

Header-len

Data-len

N-points

Data header length (constant)

Data buffer length (bytes)

Number of data points

!

Delta-f Frequency spacing in dec/pt

!

!

Pt-dec Points per decade

!

!

Hbuf(*) Real buffer containing data header

!

!

Fbuf(+) Real buffer containing log res data

!

!

Oct-buf(+) Buffer with synthesized

1/3

act data

1

...........................................................

!

INTEGER

I ,N-point

s

,Header-len ,Pt-dec

,N-f

ac

t

,Flag

t

=32

!+-

NUMBER OF LINES IN

1/3

N-f ac

ALLOCATE Trans(-N-fact:N-fact)

!

OCT FILTER

!

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

3

HeaderPlen=66

GOSUB Get-data

Gets data from the HP3562A

PRINT "GOT DATA"

GOSUB Get-pwr

Reads total power using markers

GOSUB Oct-1-3

Calculates 1/3d Octave Spec

GOSUB Restore-dat

Restores data to Analyzer

LOCAL

@I0

GOT0 W-loop

620 Getgwr:

!

!Reads power using power marker

E30 OUTPUT @Io;"XOFF;PWR;RSMO"

646 ENTER @Io;Pwr-a ,Pwr-b

650 RETURN

660 Get-data: !Reads data block

ASSIGN @ID TO 720

ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT ON

REMOTE 720

OUTPUT @Io;"COMEn

OUTPUT @Io;"DDANU

PRINT "DUMP DATA"

ENTER @I0 USING "#,2A,W";fi$,Data_len

ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT OFF

ALLOCATE REAL Hbuf(1:Header-len)

(

+

)

ENTER @Io;Hbuf

CALL Fshape(Trans(*),N-fact) !Calculates l/3d Oct fllter

!

!

EXTRACT HEADER INFORMATION

m

900

910

920

936

940

950

960

!

970 Oct-1-3:

!

Refomats data in 1/3 Octaves

980 FOR 1=1 TO N-points STEP

8

990 Oct-buf (I )=0

1000

FOR J=-(N-fact-1

)

TO (N-fact-1

)

101

0

IF (I-J)<1 OR (I-J))N-points THEN

IF

(1-J)<1 THEN Oct-dum=Fbuf(l

)

1020

1030 IF

(

I-J

)>N-points THEN Oct-dum=Fbuf (N-points

)

1040

ELSE

!

N_points=Hbuf(2

)

Cmplx-f lg=Hbuf (37

)

Log-data=Hbuf

(

41

)

IF Log-data=@ THEN GOT0 Fmt-error !Data not log res

Amp-units=Hbuf(

10)

IF Amp-units<)l THEN GOT0 Fmt-error !Units not Ult"2

Hbuf(

10

)=0.

)

Start-f=Hbuf (66

Pt-dec=l /Hbuf(56

)

!

pts per decade

el=t--="FJPt-ciec

!

ln decades

ALLOCATE Fbuf(1:N-points)

ALLOCATE Oct-buf(1:N-points)

ENTER @Io;Fbuf

(+

)

ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT ON

PRINT "DATA TRANSFER COMPLETE"

RETCRN

--

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

3

1050 Oct-dum=Fbuf

(

I-J

)

1060 END IF

1670

)=Oct-dum+Trans( J j+Oct-buf(

I

)

Oct-buf

(

I

1080 NEXT J

1098 Oct-dum=Oct-buf

(

I

1 1

60 FOR J=-3 TO

4

11

I0 IF (I+J )>=l AND (I+J )<=N-points THEN

)=SQR(Oct-durn) 1120 Oct-buf

(

I+J

1

l3@

END IF

1140 NEXT

J

1

150 NEXT

I

1160

!

1170 PRINT

"

Total Power

i:s

=

";Pwr-a;" dB

"

1180 RETURN

1190

!

1200 Restore-dat:

!

1218 PRINT "RE-STORING DftTA"

1220 OUTPUT @IoiULDAN"

1230 OUTPUT @Io USING "#,2A,WM;"#A",Data-len

1240 ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT OFF

1250 OUTPUT @Io;Hbuf

(*

);Oct-buf (+);END

1260 RETURN

1278

!

1280 W-loop:!

1290 LOCAL @Io

1300 STOP

1310 Fmt-error:

!

1320 BEEP

1330 PRINT "DATA NOT IN PROPER MEAS MODE FOR"

134 PRINT "1/3rd OCTAVE. MEASUREMENT MUST

"

1350 PRINT ".BE MADE IN LOG RESOLUTION MODE

"

1360 PRINT "AND IN AMP UNITS OF VLT"2

1370 CLEAR @Io

t

1408 SUB Fs

hape(

Trans(

*

,

INTEGER N-f act

)

!

!

SUB PROGRAM TO CALCULATE THE

!

FILTER SHAPE OF

A

li3 RD OCT

!

CLASS

111

FILTER

!

INTEGER

N

FOR N=-N-fact TO N-fact

IF

N(=4 HND N>=-4 THEN

Ntten=l

ELSE

At

ten=( 8/13+2568+( 10"( N/8O

)-I

BB"( -NiS@

j

)"6

)

END IF

/At

ten Transi N )=l

NEXT N

SUBEND

.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

4

!

APPENDIX C

-

EXAMPLE PROGRAM

4

...........................................................

!

!

DEMO PROGRAM DUMP COORDINATE TRANSFORM

BLOCK

!

!

(c)

COPYRIGHT 1985, Hewlett-Packard Co.

!

last update 3-14-85

!

BASIC

3.0

!

!

!

PURPOSE:

!

!

This program will read coord transform block from

!

HP3562A analyzer over the HP-IB bus using

!

the capability of the Series 200.

!

The data is assumed

to

be dB magnitude data and

!

Hz frequency domain power spectrum data.

!

The data is repeatedly read and displayed in a

!

spectral map format. Only the data actual displayed

!

is read and plotted.

!

!

DATA DICTIONARY:

!

!

!

Header-len Data header length (constant)

!

!

Chead-len Coordinate transform header length

!

!

Data-len Data buffer length (bytes)

!

!

N-points Number of data points

!

Cbuf(*) Real buffer for coord transform header

!

!

!

Hbuf(*) Real buffer containing data header

!

Buff(*) Real buffer containing coord trans data

!

!

Mask,(*) Data buffer containing max values; used

!

for hidden line calculations

!

!

Pent(

*

)

Pen control buffer for hidden lines

!

...........................................................

!

INTEGER I ,Real ,Imag ,Mag ,Phase ,Done-f lg

DIM

A$[3l

Real=

1

Imag=2

!

Headgr_len=66

Chead_len=50

Done-flg=0

!

Data header length

!

Coord trans-form header length

!

Measurement done flag

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

4

550 ASSIGN @Io TO 720

560

REMOTE @Io

570 ALLOCATE REAL

Hbuf(1:Header-len),Cbuf(l:Chead-len)

580 Control:

!

590 N-spect =25

600 GOSUB Dsa-setup

610

GOSUB

Get-head

620 GOSUB Plot-init

630 GOSUB Hpib-init

640

FOR K=O TO N-spect-1

650

!

660

!

Wait for End of Measurement

670 W-data:IF Done-flg=0 THEN GOT0 W-data

680

!

6

90

GOSUB Get-data

700

GOSUB Meas-start

710 GOSUB Plot-out

720 NEXT

K

730 LOCAL @Io

740

W-1oop:GOTO W-loop

!

Wait (suppress softkey menu)

750

!

760 Get-data:

!

Gets data and calculates hidden lines

770

GOSUB Mask-update

780 OUTPUT @Io;"DCANn !Dump Coord trans Ansi

790

ENTER @Io USING "#,2A,W";A$,Data_len

00

ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT OFF

810 ENTER @Io;Cbuf(*);Hbuf(*)

(

*

)

820 ENTER @Io; Buf f

830 ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT ON

840 FOR I=0 TO N-points-1

!

Set clipping boundary

I

)

860

IF Buff

(

I )>Y-maxl THEN Buff

(

I )=Y-maxl

870

NEXT

I

880

!

918 FOR 1=0 TO N-points-1

Pent(

I

)=SGN(Penc(

I)

)

920

930

NEXT I

940 Done-f lg=l

950 RETURN

960

!

970 Mask-update:

!

Does

X

&

Y

axis shifting and mask update

980 FOR I=N-points-N-delta-x TO N-points-1

9

90 Mask( I )=CY-min-Delta-y)

1000 NEXT

I

1010 Xshift:FOR I=N-delta-x TO N-points-1

(

I

)=Buff

(

I )+el

t

a-y

Buff

1020

1030

Mask(I-N-delta-x)=MAX(Mask(I)-Uelta_y,Buff(I))

1048 NEXT I

1050 RETURN

!

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

2024年9月29日发(作者:羿暄和)

Chapter 5-The Display

Control

Group

DIRECT

BINARY

PROGRAMlVHNG

I

Floating

Point

(LU

The LUAN command loads the active display buffer with 64-bit ANSI floating point values,

which are converted to integers. Here is a sample listing:

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DBSZ100,I"

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DBACI"

OUTPUT @Dsa; "LUAN"

OUTPUT @Dsa USING "#,2A,W";"#A",40

OUTPUT @Dsa; FORMAT OFF

OUTPUT @Dsa; Array(*)

OUTPUT @Dsa; FORMAT ON

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DBUR"

After receiving LUAN, the analyzer expects to receive #A to specify ANSl data followed by the

length word specifying the number of bytes to be output (40 in this example). After receiving

these first four bytes, the analyzer is ready for data, which is in "Array" in this example. (The

ASCII formatter was deactivated for this computer to prevent it from converting ANSl to ASCII.

Your computerllanguage may handle this differently; if it automatically formats output data to

ASCII, you need to disable this feature before sending ANSl data.) Finally, buffer #I is put up

on the display.

uffers

in

Internal

Binary (LUBN)

The LUBN command loads the active display buffer in the

HP

3562A1s internal binary format.

This load command can be used only with data that have been dumped from the analyzer in

(or externally converted to) the internal binary format. Here is a sample listing:

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DBSZ100,I"

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DBACI"

OUTPUT @Dsa; "LUBN"

USING "#,2A,W";"#A",IO OUTPUT @Dsa

OUTPUT @Dsa; FORMAT ON

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DBUW"

After receiving LUBN, the analyzer expects to receive #A to specify binary data followed by the

length word specifying the number of bytes to be output (10 in this example). After receiving

these first four bytes, the analyzer is ready for data, which is in "Array" in this example. (The

ASCII formatter was deactivated for this computer to prevent it from converting binary to ASCII.

Your computerllanguage may handle this differently; if it automatically formats output data to

ASCII, you need to disable this feature before sending binary data,) Finally, buffer #I is put up

on the display.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-The

Display

Control Group

DISPLAY PROGRAMMING

WITH

BASlC 3.0

As explained at the beginning of this chapter, the third method of display programming is

defining the analyzer's display as the plotter for BASlC 3.0 graphics. The use of this technique

is described in BASlC 3.0 Graphics Techniques. The command used to specify the display is:

PLOTTER

IS

720, "HPGL"

,.

where 720 is the analyzer's address

For example, the following BASlC 3.0 statements plot a box and some large text on the display:

PLOTTER

IS

720, "HPGL"

OUTPUT 720; "DBSZ250,l"

OUTPUT 720; "DBAC1"

VIEWPORT 0,88,5,99

WINDOW -730,130,-100,100

FRAME

LORG

5

CSlZE 17

MOVE 0,O

LABEL

"BIG

TEXT"

OUTPUT 720; "DBUPI"

This example also demonstrates the ability of this technique to draw larger textthan is possible

with the HP-GL technique.

Every display buffer in the

HP

3562A, both user buffers and the analyzer's own internal

buffers, can be dumped via HP-IB. The internal buffers hold data traces, marker readouts, etc.

This section shows you how to select the buffer to be dumped, describes the internal display

b~uffe~rs,~and~shows~how~to~dump~tke~selected-buffer~

Dumping buffers takes two steps: first, use the vector block pointer (VBLK) to identify the buffer

to be dumped. Second, select the data format in which you want the data dumped, then send

the appropriate command. Buffers can be dumped in ASCII, ANSI floating point, and the

internal binary formats. (For general information on these formats, please refer to Chapter 3.)

Display buffers contain 1345A binary commands (see "Direct Binary Programming" earlier in

this chapter). When HP-GL or BASlC 3.0 commands are loaded, they are converted to 1345A

cpmmands by the analyzer. Because of this conversion, you can program a display initially

with HP-GL or BASIC 3.0, load it into the analyzer, then dump out the direct binary equivalent.

If

you then store these binary commands, you can have the speed advantage of direct binary

any time in the future that this display is needed.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-The Display

Control

Group

DUMPING

DISPLM BUFFERS

The

Vector

Display

uffea Pointer

(V

The buffer to be dumped is selected with the vector buffer pointer command (VBLK). Its

syntax is:

where n is the buffer number

The number you specify with n depends on whethe; or not user buffers are being used. Table

5-1 shows the value of n to be used for dumping all user and internal display buffers. Note that

to dump user buffers, their numbers are offset by

+

4

from the number used to identify them

for other graphics commands.

Table

5-1

Identifying

Buffer

Pointer Values

Value

of

n

(VBIKn)

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

User buffer

-

-

-

-

0

Internal

buffer

Softkey underlining

Softkey menu

Command echo

Message

Special markers, trace

A

Special markers, trace

B

X

marker readout

Y marker readout

Trace

A

Trace

B

Grid

-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Ya readout

Y

b readout

Xa readout

Xb readout

A

label

If any user buffer has been created, the user buffer corresponding to n is dumped. Otherwise,

the internal buffer corresponding to n is dumped. For example, if you set up a user buffer with

the

DBSZ

command then send VBLKIO, you will get user buffer

6

if you send a dump com-

mand. However, if you had not created a user buffer and you sent VBLKIO, you would get the

internal grid buffer in response to

a

dump command.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

5-The

Display

Control Group

DUMPING

DISPLAY BUFFERS

The display buffer identified with the vector buffer pointer (VBLK) can be dumped in ASCII

format with the DVAS command. There is no header with this transfer, just #I and the length

variable. The following BASIC statements dump the internal buffer that contains the softkey

labels:

OPTION BASE

1

OUTPUT 720; "DVAS"

ENTER 720 USING "2A,K";A$,Length

REDlM Buffer(Length)

ENTER 720 Buffer(*)

This dumps the #I format specifier into A$, the length variable into "Length," and the ASCII

variables into integer array "Buffer."

Dumping

Buffers in ANSI

Floating Point

(DVAN)

The display buffer identified with the vector buffer pointer (VBLK) can be dumped in ANSI

floating point format with the DVAN command. There is no header with this transfer, just #A and

the length word indicating the number of bytes to be transferred. The following BASIC state-

ments dump the internal buffer that contains the softkey labels:

OPTION BASE

1

ASSIGN @Dsa

to

720

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DVAN"

ENTER @Dsa USING "%,2A,W";A$,Length

REDlM Buffer (Length DIV 8)

ASSIGN

@;

Dsa FORMAT OFF

ENTER @Dsa Buffer(*)

This dumps the #A format specifier into A$, the length word into "Length," then redimensions

the array to Length18 (&byte floating point values).

The display buffer identified with the vector buffer pointer (VBLK) can be dumped in the

analyzer's internal binary format with the DVBN command. There is no header with this trans-

fer, just #A and the length word indicating the numberof bytes to be transferred. The following

BASIC statements dump the internal buffer that contains the softkey labels:

OPTION BASE

1

ASSIGN @Dsa to 720

OUTPUT @Dsa; "DVBN"

ENTER @Dsa USING "%,2A,W";A$,Length

REDlM Buffer (Length DIV 8)

ASSIGN @Dsa; FORMAT OFF

ENTER @Dsa Buffer(*)

This dumps the #A format specifier into A$, the length word into "Length," then redimensions

the array to Length12 (2-byte values).

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

11345A

COMMANDS.

NOTE:

Bit Dl 5 is used only for vector memory board

5 commands. For standard 1345A commands,

Dl

should be

0.

Pr~gramming Command Ranges.

I

PROGRAMMING COMMAND RANGES OF THE 1345A

,134SA Command

a Plol

X

Y lbeam 0111

Y lbeam on1

b Graph

Set Della-X

Y t

beam olf

Y rbem on1

c Text

d Set Condltlon

Oclat Range

00000-07777

10000-13777

14000-17777

20000.27777

30000-33777

34000-37777

40000-57777

60000-77777

Hexadeclmal Range

13458% 16

Bit

Data

Word.

MSB

Dl4 D131~12 Dl1 Dl0 D9

LSB

Dl DB

P

D8 D7 D6. D5 D4 03 02

COMMAND^

COMMAND MODIFIERS

1345A COMMANDS

Set Condllion

Plol Command

Graph Command

Text Command

Graph Command.

Graph

Command:

MSB

Dl4 Dl3 012

0 1 XY

Set

Condition Command.

Set Condlllon Command:

~lll

Dl0

PC

1

Dta

I*

!

i

D9

Ds

D8 D7

DB DI

DATA

D6

136

D5

D5

04

DI

LSB

D3 D2 Dl D0

Dl D2 D? DB

-

I

MSB

Dl4 D131D12 Dl1 Dl0 DY

I 1/1r

IU

D8 D7

LI LB

D6

0

D5 D4

WI

D3

WO

D2

LSB

Dl DB

Command Modlfters:

a XY lnlormat~on ID121

0 = Set Delta-X increment, spec~lied by DB-DIB lor all subsequent Y coordinales

1 = Set Y coordinate, specilled by Da-Dl8 The beam

IS

to be moved to thls

Y

In conlunctlori with the Delta X increment

I

I

b

PC Beam Control Inlormallon ID1

x x x x x x

Note: Bit 6 ID61 must be

Command Modlllers:

a To Set Line Intensdy:

It

-

0

0

1

1

b. To Set Line Type:

Ll

-

0

0

1

1

c To Sel Wrltmg Speed

Type

Solid Line

lntensilied End Poinls on Solid Line

Long Dashes

Short Dashes

Intensity

Blank

Dim

Hall Brighlness

Full Brightness

0 = Beam OFF (move,

1

=

Beam ON ldrawl

MEMORY

BOARD COMMANDS.

Vector Memory Word.

--

I

1

0

0

Speed

005 In per ps

OlOmperps

0 15 In per ps

020 In per ps

1

0

I

0

internal dump.

An internal jump does no1 affect the Vector Memory address pointer.

Plot Command.

Plot Command:

MSB

1

Dl4 Dl3 Dl2 DlllD10 09 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2

LSB

Dl D0

MIS MI4 MI3 MI2 Mil MI0 M9

M8

1

M7

A7

M6

A6

M5 M4

M3 M2

A4

A3

Mi M0

Aih

0

X X AII Ale

A3

AB

A5

A2

X

=

DON'T CARE

M15 = 1, MI 4 = 0: lnlernal jump to Vector Memory address specilied by All thru

As

during

relresh.

-. .

Command Modlllers:

a. XY Intormation (Dl21

0 = X coordinate (0-2847). specified by Do-DIE

1

= Y coordinate (0.2047). specified by DB-DIB

b

PC Beam Control Information (Dl 1)

0 = Beam OFF (move1

1

=

Bcam ON (drawl

XXX

Address Pointer.

X = DON'T CARE

As

=

0: Set poinlei regisler to the Vector Memory address value specified by All lhru AB.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

5-Display

Control Group

1345A

Modified ASCII

Character Set.

1345A MODIFIED ASCll CODE CONVFRStON TARLE

MOST SIGNIFICANT CHARACTER

1 234

5

centered

'

SP

cenlered o !

0

1

2

3

4

5

8

9

.

Capabilities for Character

and Vector

Combinations.

0

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

6

'

7

P

q

l

s

t

u

V

w

x

Y

Z

i

:

@

HP logo

P

LEAST

SIGNIFICANT

CHARACTER

upper-hall tc

lower-hall Itc

lefl-half

IIC

rtghl-half ltc

back space

112 shlfl down

llne leed

lnv lhne leed

112

shill

up

carrlage relurn

hor~zontal Itc

verl~cal Itc

EXAMPLES

HP logo

A

I

-

I

7r

I

7

a

A

u

$

%

1

1

t

;

A

B

c

D

E

H

1

J

(degreet

II

P-

.

.

K

P

O

R

s

T

U

V

w

X

Y

Z

I

a

b

c

d

e

l

9

h

I

Average character drawing lime. 16 -sec

Recommended relresh rate: 60 Hz

-

16.6 msec

1345A writing speed: 0.1 in./-sec

Veclor dead lime: 1 -sec

NUMBER OF CHARACTERS TO BE DRAWN

0

Tolal frame time (msec)

Characler writing time

(msec)

Ttme len lo draw vectors

(

msec)

100

16.67

200

16.67

300

16.67

16.67

I

k

I

.

0

A

/

=

>

?

L

M

N

O

Im

"n

-

O

q

O

t

AVERAGE VECTOR

LENGTH

0.1 in.

0.5 in

2 0 in.

=

r

t

l~ne leed

=

=

=

=

=

01

41

69

16

7F

09

wi

N

APPROXIMATE NUMBER OF VECTORS DRAWN

6.0 in.

I

Text Command.

Text Command:

MSB

Dl4 013 D12 Dl1 Dl0 D9

1 0 SI S0 Ri Ro

D8

I

I

Vector Drawing

Time

Calculations.

VECTOR DRAWING TIME =

WRITING SPEED VECTOR

IENGTH

+

*

I

PICTURE DRAWING TIME =

1

LENGTH

+

-h%

WRITING SPEED VECTOR

15ps

CHARACTER

D7

C7

D6

C6

D5

C5

04 03 D2 Dl

CI

LSB

DB

N =TOTAL NUMBER OF VECTORS

M = TOTAL NUMBER OF CHARACTERS

ES

O

C3 C2

CB

i-

I

CHARACTER

Command Modlliers:

For Co-C?. see modifled ASCll conversion lable

a ES Establtsh

Size

of Characler

0 = Use previous stze and rolal~on

1

= Eslablish new size and rolallon accordmg to SI.

SB.

RI and Ro

b Rolale Characler CCW

Vector Length

vs.

Writing

Speed for

60

Ha:

Refresh Rate.

I

Rotalion

0

degrees

Sodegrees

180 degrees

270 degrees

I

1

PROGRAMMABLE CHARACTER S1ZE5:

1.0

X

56 characlers per line. 29 horizontal lines possible.

1.5

X

37 characters per line. 19 horizonlal lines possible.

horizontal lines possible 2.0

X

28 characters per line. I4

2.5

X

22 characters per line. 1

I

horizonlal lines possible.

I

COHDITIOHSa

REFRESH.16.67mSEC

'

2'

VECTOR LENGTH

3'

Character Rotation.

I

SP=CHARaCTER STARTING POINT

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

5-Display

Control Group

This section of the DESIGNERS MANUAL will describe the programmable functions of the 1345A

Digital Display Module. Proper understanding of the capabilities and limitations of the 1345A will

enable the user to obtain optimum performance. This section of the manual will be divided into three

parts. These three parts will address the areas of 1345A Programming Commands, 1345A Display

Requirements, and Performance Optimization. It is recommended that the user read through Section

4, Interfacing the 1345A, prior to reading this section. Please read the complete text once to gain a firm

foundation of the total 1345A operating environment.

The 1345A Digital Display has 4 commands. These are PLOT, GRAPH, SETCONDITION, and TEXT.

These four commands provide complete programmable vector and text generation with a minimum of

command overhead. Most vector and text operations can be handled with only one 16 bit command

word.

The 1345A receives 16 bit data words over the 26 pin interface connector. These 16 bit data words

are decoded by the 1345A into one of four distinct commands. Each 16 bit data word sent to the

1345A can be separated into two distict data fields. The 1345A 16 bit data word is shown in figure 5-1.

Each of the commands that the 1345A can recognize is selected by the state of data bits Dl4 and

Dl 3. Data bit Dl 5 is used onlyfor memory board operations and is discussed 1345A without

memory uses only data bits DO-Dl 4. The lower 13 data bits DO-Dl2 are used as command modifiers.

I

1345A COMMANDS

Bii4

Set Condition

Plot Command

Graph Command

Text Command

Bi[3,

I

Figure

5-1. 1345A

16

Bit Data

Word

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

These modifiers allow each command to have several selectable attributes. Vector drawing

operations are directly dependent on the status of these data bits in every 1345A command. Each of

these commands and their modifiers will be dicussed using programming examples. The 16 bit data

for the examples will be in HEXADECIMAL or HEX format. This format is easier to follow than 16 bit

binary data words'. Each HEX data word sent to the 1345A will be equivalent to a 16 bit binary word.

HEX

Format

Generation. Each 16 bit data word can be separated into four, four bit binary numbers.

This allows each four *bit binary number to have sixteen distinct combinations. Each of these

combinations is assigned a HEX equivalence, fhe conversion from binary to HEX is contained in

figure 5-2.

Each data word in the following command examples will use this HEX format. These HEX

representations will correspond to the required bit patterns recognized by the 1345A.

Binary Code

b4 b3 b2 br

Figure

5-2.

Binary

to

HEX

Conversion

G

EXAMPLES.

Vector Plotting.

An explanation of vector drawing will help clarify the process. In figure 5-3, there are three vectors

defined by four endpoints. Each vector requires two endpoints. The vector from point

1

to point 2

requires two endpoint declarations. The vector from point

2

to point 3 requires only point 3 be declared

as an endpoint, because point 2 is already established. The vector drawn from point

2

to point 3 is a

vector with the beam off. This allows the beam to be moved to new vector starting points without

with the beam on. The

affecting existing displayed vectors. The vector from point 3 to point

4

isdrawn

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

.-

-

Figure 5-3. Vector Plotting

correct sequence for constructing vectors in PLOT mode is ALWAYS Xfirst, Y next, X, Y,

X,

.

. .

,

Y,

until

the vector sequence is comp1ete.A vector is plotted according to the last SET CONDITION command

sent to the 1345A.

The "BEAM

ON"

bit in the PLOT command is ignored if the coordinate being specified is an X value.

The beam status only has effect

if the

Y

coordinate is being entered. The CRT beam will move to the

location specified by the last X and

Y

coordinate values specified in the PLOT commands.

Graph

Plotting.

An example of the graph command is contained in figure 5-4. In this example

15

vectors are drawn

with only

20

commands. The sequence is described below.

Step

1

-

Set Condition to define line type

Plot command to set

X

location at lower left corner of graph

Step

2

-

Step

3

-

Plot command to set

Y

location at lower left corner of graph.

Step

5

-

Graph command with beam off and Y value set to

0.

This will not plot anything, but is

used to initiate the

'X

increment to point

1.

Step

6

-

Graph command with beam on and

Y

value set to point

1.

Step 7

-

Graph command with beam on and

Y

value set to point

2.

(send only Y values of points

3

through 14)

Step

20

-

Graph command with beam on and Y value set to point

15

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

5-Display

Control Group

Normal X,Y plot mode would require 33 commands to construct the same graph. Note thatthe above

ce does not include generation of the graph axis, only construction of the graph

itself.

The construction of a graph can have two forms. The vectors may start at either the origin or

somewhere along the Y axis of the graph. If the origin is the starting point, then the user needs to set

the first Y value to zero. This will not plot anything but will start the graph at the origin and increment the

X

value by one. When the next

Y

value is sent, a vector will be drawn from the origin to the new

Y

value.

If the Y axis is the starting point then the user needs to send the first

Y

value with the beam will

insure that the axis of the graph is not altered by the line type set for the graph trace. For the next

Y

value the beam should be turned on.

Figure

5-4.

Graph Mode Example

Set

Condition Command.

When

Dl

4 and

Dl

3 are both in the High TTL state, the 1345A will interpret the data word as a SET

CONDITION

command. This command is used to set vector attributes. The attributes affected are

By

combining line intensity and writing speed parameters, up to twelve levels of discernible intensities

can be generated. Figure

5-6

contains several example combinations. This allows the user to create

displays with background graticules and intensify important trace data. The beam will be brightest

with the intensity set at full bright at the slowest writing speed. The beam will be dimmest with the

intensity set at dim at the fastest writing speed. The SET CONDITION command may be executed at

any time and the vector attributes will remain in another SET CONDITION command is

executed. Data bit

6

in this command is defined to be TTL low. This MUST occur when the Set

Condition command is executed or the display may respond in an undefined fashion.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

5-Display

Control Group

Set

Condition

Command:

I

MSB

I

Dl4 D131D12 Dl1 Dl0

D9

D8 D7

D6

D5 D4 D3 D2

LSB

Dl D0

Note: Bit

6

(D6) must be zero.

Command

Modifiers:

a. To Set Line Intensity:

Intensity

Blank

Dim

Half Brightness

Full Brightness

b.

TO'S^^

Line Type:

L1

L0

TY pe

Solid Line

Intensified End Points on Solid Line

Long Dashes

Short Dashes

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

c.

To Set Writing Speed:

WI

1

1

W0

Speed

0.05 in. per ps

0.1 0 in, per ps

1

0

Figure

5-5.

Set Condition Command

6998h

Dim, Short Dash,.Speed 0.05

Bright, Solid, Speed 0.2

Half Bright, Solid, Speed 0.2

Half Bright, Long Dash, Speed 0.2

7800h

7000h

7100h

Figure

5-6.

Set

Condition Examples In Hex

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

Plot

Command.

When the two most significant bits of the data word

,Dl

4 and Dl 3 are

in

a low TTL state, the 1345A will

recognize the data word to be a PLOT command. Figure

5-7 contains the correct bit pattern for this

command.

Plot

Command:

MSB

Dl4 Dl3 Dl2

DII

0 0 XY

1

I

I

Dl0

09

D8

D8

07 D6

D7

DATA

D6

D5

D5

D4

D4

D3

D3

D2

D2

LS B

Dl D0

Dl DB

B-

PCIDle

D9

14

Command Modifiers:

a. XY lnformation (D12)

0

=

X

coordinate (0-2047), specified by DB-DIB

1

=

Y coordinate (0-2047), specified by DB-DIB

b. PC Beam Control lnformation (Dl

1

)

0

=

Beam OFF (move)

1

=

Beam ON (draw)

Figure

5-7.

Plot Command Bit Pattern

This command moves the beam to a specific X-Y location in the defined cartesian coordinate plane

each time an X-Y coordinate pair is received. The values of the X and Y coordinates range from 0 to

2047. The origin of the cartesian plane is located in the lower left corner and has an X-Y value of (0,O).

This command also turns the beam on or off for each vector. The beam may be moved in either mode.

.

-

.

- -

-

-4o;

-

;t-j@&+@&$&&+t

. .

--

&&+&&/

-

-

@

X,Y coordinate values in the PLOT commands. The vector is drawn in accordance with the last SET

CONDITION command received by the 1345A.

The diagram in figure 5-8 is a single vector defined by its endpoints in the vector drawing area. To

draw this line the 1345A would need to receive two sets of

X

and Y coordinates. The 1345A receives

the coordinates in the specified order XI ,Y1 ,X2,Y2. The beam is moved only when the Y coordinate is

received. The status of the beam is only affected by the beam status bit in the Y coordinate command.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display

Control

Group

Figure

5-8.

Vector Defined

By

Endpoints

An example of vector plotting is contained in figure 5-9. This example contains vectors drawn with the

beam on and with the beam off. The steps to draw these figures are given in the required sequence

with equivalent HEX code for the 16 bit data words.

BOX

1

BOX

2

BEAH

NQVEHEWT

BEAM

PIDVEHENT

,

B

EAPl

tl

I

I

Drawing a Square

BEAM

OFF

I

1-C

I

Drawing Two Horizontal Lines

Figure

5-9.

Plot Vector Example

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

5-Display

Control

Group

To draw the figures, send the following

16

bit data words in sequence to the

1345A.

Command

Step

1.

Set Condition

2.

Plot

XI

3.

Plot

Y1

(beam off)

ox

'I

data

781 8h

0200h

1200h

1 FOOh

8FOOh

1 FOOh

1 AOOh

0200h

1 AOOh

Box

2

data

781 8h

0200h

1200h

13454

Sets Vector type

(Solid Full Bright,

.05)

XI =512

move to

Y1=512

move to

Y2=1792

X3=1792

4. PLot

Y2

(beam on)

5.

Plot

X3

6.

Plot

Y3

(beam on)

(beam off)

1 700h

8FOOh

1 FOOh

move to

Y3=1792

move to

Y 4=512

X1 =512

7.

Plot

Y4

(beam on)

8.

Plot

X1

9.

Plot

Yl

(beam on)

(beam off)

1 200h

0200h

1

AOO~

move to

Y1=512

A

description of these two examples will help the user understand the vector plotting process. Step

1

defines the vector attributes for the vectors to be plotted by the

1345A.

Definition of a starting point is

crucial when plotting vectors. Steps

2

and

3

initialize the starting point of the box. Next a new

Y

value is

received indicating that the beam be turned on. Since the

X

value didn't change, only a new

Y

value

need be sent. The beam will move to the location specified by the

X-Y

location when the

Y

value is

received. The vector is drawn according to the status of the last SET CONDITION command.

When a new horizontal location is required, both the

X

and

Y

coordinates need to be sent to the

1 345A.

The beam is only moved and the vector drawn when a

Y

coordinate is received. The

Y

value doesn't

change going from step

4

to step

5,

but the

X

value requires that a new

X-Y

coordinate pair

be sent to the

1345A

as in steps

5

and

6.

In step

7,

the

X

value doesn't require a change so onlya new

Y

value is sent in step 7. The beam is turned on to draw the vector. In steps

8

and

9

a new

X-Y

pair is

required so both values must be sent. To draw box

2,

only steps

5

and 7 need to be changed. The

beam status bit tells the 1345sdrawn,but

with the beam tuped off.

The user should notice that when a vector is to be drawn vertically, only a

Y

value is sent for the

second vector endpoint. The

1345A

has a "last

X"

register that stores the value of the last

X

location.

This feature allows vertical vectors with the same

X

values to be drawn with one less endpoint

requirement.

When plotting vectors in the vector drawing area, the user should take into account the difference in

CRT screen height and width. The

1345A

vector. drawing area is

9.5

cm high by

12.5

cm wide and has

2048

addressable points in either direction.

If

this difference is not taken into account, boxes will

appear as rectangles. To plot vectors correctly, the user may need to apply a scaling factor to vector

endpoint calculations. The scaling factors for the

1345A

are approximately

215.58

addressable

direction and

163.84

addressable pointslcm in the

X

direction. These figures are points1 cm in the

Y

used when calculating the actual length of vectors in cm.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display

Control

Group

Graph

Command.

The GRAPH command is very similar to the PLOT command. The purpose of the GRAPH command is

and

to allow plotting of vectors that have equal incremental

X

coordinates. When data word bits Dl4

Dl 3 are TTL low and TTL high respectively the 1345A will interpret the data word to be a GRAPH

command as shown in figure 5-1 0. In the GRAPH mode, the 1345A will automatically increment the X

coordinate after each Y-coordinate is received. This allows single valued functions to be plotted in

graph form with fewer endpoints than would be possible using

X,Y

coordinates for each data point.

I

I

I

I

Graph

Command:

MSB

i

Dl4 Dl3 Dl2 Dl1

1

Dl0 D9

0

D8

D8

D7

07

D6

D6

D5 D4

D4

D3

03

D2

D2

LSB

Dl DB

DI DB

B-

1

XY PC) D10

I

I

Ds

D5

!

"

Command

Modifiers:

a. XY Information (012)

DATA

0

=

Set Delta-X increment, specified by DB-Din for all subsequent Y coordinates

1

=

Set Y coordinate, specified by 00-010. The beam is to be moved to this Y

in conjunction with the Delta X increment.

b. PC Beam Control lnformation (Dl 1

)

0

=

Beam OFF (move)

1

=

Beam ON (draw)

Figure

5-10.

Bit Definition For Graph Command

There are three command modifiers in the GRAPH command. These modifiers control the X

2

is 0, the data in bits DO-Dl 0

increment, Y coordinate data value, and the beam status. When Dl

define the value of the X increment. This is the amount the X coordinate will increase after each Y

coordinate is plotted. The range of the X increment is 0 to 2047. It should be noted that X increases

relative to present X,Y coordinate values on the screen. Figure 5-1 1 contains an example of the graph

mode commands. The beam moves when the

Y

coordinate value is receiv

I

Figure

5-1

1.

Graph Mode Example

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

To create the output in figure 5-1 0 the following steps were executed with the given 16 bit HEX data.

Command

Step

1. Set Condition

2. Plot XI

3. Plot YI (beam off)

4. Graph command Set Delta X

5. Graph command Y1

6. Graph command Y2

7. Graph command Y3

8. Graph command Y4

16

Bit

Data

1345A

781 8h

0200h

1200h

2040h

328011

3280h

3300h.

3280h

Set Vector Attributes

(Solid Full Bright, .05)

X=512

move to Y=512

set X increment to 64

Y=640

Y=640

Y=768

Y=640

Step 1 defines the line type, speed, and intensity. Steps 2 and 3 determine the starting point of the

Y

values are sent in steps 5-8. The value

graph. The delta X increment is established in step (4)

of X is incremented AFTER each Y value is received.

If the graph is to start at the axis origin, then execute a graph command with afirst Y value set to zero.

This will not plot anything, but will increment the X value by delta X. The next vector will be drawn from

the origin to the Y value for the first X increment.

If

the graph is to start at the Y axis, then execute a Y

value command. The next vector will be drawn from the Y value on the Y axis to the Y value of the first

X increment.

Text.

The 1345A comes complete with an internal character generator. This internal character data is a

modified ASCII character set for graphics use. The data for commanding the 1345A to enter the text

mode is in figure

5-1

2. Data bits Dl 4 must be TTL high and Dl 3 must be TTL low. When this command

is executed the 1345A will interpret the lower eight data bits, DO-D7 as an equivalence for an ASCII or

pecial character. Each vector of the character is drawn on the CRT screen according to the vector

cnaracterlstlcs ot the last

S

sarealways drawn at the

slowest writing speed. The he type has no visible effect except on the largest character size, (2.5X).

The position is defined by the last X and Y coordinates received by the 1345A.

When generating characters, the 1345A automatically provides character spacing to the right of each

TEXT command has command modifiers for size and rotation information. New size

and rotation information is controlled by the status of data word bit D8. To initiate new character

attributes, bit 08 must be set high as a new information indicator.

If

this data bit is "Ow, the size and

rotation bits are ignored.

The 1345A has 4 character sizes. These 4 sizes are defined by the status of bits Dl 1 and Dl 2. The

amount of space needed to draw the characters is contained in figure 5-1 2. This is the required space

needed out of 2048 X 2048 possible points. The number of characters that can be drawn across the

screen at the different sizes is in figure 5-1 3. An example of 1 x character spacing is contained in figure

5-1 4.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

Text

Command:

Command

Modifiers:

For CB-C7, see figure 5-1 4

a. ES Establish Size of Character

0

=

Use previous size and rotation

1

=

Establish new size and rotation according to SI

,

S0,

RI

and RB

b. Rotate Character CCW

Rotation

0 degrees

90 degrees

1 80 degrees

270 degrees

c. Character Size

4

PROGRAMMABLE CHARACTER SIZES:

1

.O X

56

characters per line, 29 horizontal lines possible.

1.5

X

37

characters per line, 19 horizontal lines possible.

2.0

X

28 characters per line, 14 horizontal lines possible.

2.5

X

22 characters per line, 11 horizontal lines possible.

Figure

5-13. 1345A Character Display Capabilities

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

5-Display

Control Group

Figure

5-14.

Example

of 1x

Character Spacing

The starting position of each character is the lower left corner of the defined character cell. After

drawing a character, the 1345A advances to the starting point of the next character much like a

typewriter would operate. The 1345A also contains many special characters that facilitate graphics

and display annotation. Figure 5-15 contains the modified 1345A ASCII character set in

HEX

format.

This

HEX

code is sent to the 1345A

in

the lower

8

bits of each text command.

1345A MODIFIED

ASCII

CODE CONVERSION TABLE

MOST SIGNIFICANT CHARACTER

0

I

5

P

1

2

SP

!

"

#

$

%

&

'

(

)

*

3

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

LI+-I.-

4

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

6

'

7

p

q

r

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

(

)

O

5-

LEAST

SIGNIFICANT

CHARACTER

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

HP

logo

L?

upper-half tic

lower-half tic

left-half tic

right-half tic

back space

1 I2 shift down

line feed

inv. line feed

112 shift

UD

carriage return

horizontal tic

vertical tic

EXAMPLES:

HP logo

A

centered

*

centered o

t

-

1

7~

d-

A

+

"

(degree)

R

f9

P

+

,

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

]

A

-

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

m

n

o

r

h

0

.

/

=

>

?

M

N

O

I

=

=

=

d-

5-

I

=

=

=

line feed

01

41

69

16

7F

09

Figure 5-75. 1345~ Modified ASCII Character Set

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

I

CHARACTER CELL

I

SP

=

CHARACTER STARTING

POINT

Figure 5-16. Character Rotation

Character rotation is an additional feature of the 1345A. The 1345A can be programmed to rotate any

character at 0,90,180, or 270 degrees rotation measured counter clockwise from horizontal. This can

be done for any character at starting point of the character is always the lower left corner

relative to any rotation. For character rotation, the entire character area is rotated the specified

number of degrees and the starting point moves around in a counter clockwise fashion. For example

the starting point of a character rotated 180 degrees would be the upper right corner. This technique is

illustrated in figure 5-16.

Since the starting point of the character changes with rotation, so does the direction of character

spacing. If the rotation is 180 degrees, the characters will be written upside down from right to left. If

the rotation mode is 270 degrees, the characters will advance from too to bottom. Rotation spacing

examples are contained in figure 5-17.

DIRECTOR

OF

CHARACTER SPACING

Figure

5-1

7.

Character Rotation Spacing

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

Character generation on the 1345A has several capabilities that the user need be aware of. Certain

characters that the 1345A is capable of drawing CANNOT be written within a certain distances of

certain CRT screen boundaries. These characters are listed in Figure 5-18. The characters are

referenced to the to the screen boundary at which the limitation occurs.

It is important to observe the recommended character boundary specifications, to avoid problems

which might be encountered by writing at the screen edges. Figure 5-19 contains recommended

limits for each character size at each screen edge. Failure to observe these limits may result in

undefined results particularly when writing characters listed in figure 5-1 8. The user should plot all

characters within these specified borders.

The user should not attempt to write any character along a screen edge. The character spacing

guidelines in figure 5-19 allow ample spacing for characters of all specified sizes. Characters NOT

specified in figure 5-18 may be written closer to the screen borders but it is not recommended.

BOUNDARY CHARACTERS

Left Boundary:

07 "right-half tic"; 08 "back space"; 0E "horizontal tic"; 0F "vertical tic";

10 "centered

*";

11 "centered ow; 41 "A"; 57 "W"; 5F

"-";

77 "w"

05 "lower-half tic"; 09 "1 12 shift down"; OA "line feed"; 0F "vertical Bottom Boundary: 02

"Po;

1C 24

"$";

28

"(";

tic"; 10 "centered

*";

11 "centered

0";

19

29

")";

2C

",";

38 "."; 51

"Q";

58

"[";

5D

"1";

5F 67 t8g"; 6A

Uj";

70 Up";

71 Uq"; 79 Uy"; 7B

"{";

7D

"1"

Top Boundary:

Right Boundary:

1 A

"O

(degree)";

01 "HP logo"; 08 "inv. line feed"; 0C "1 12 shift up"; 16

"J-";

24 "$". 28

"(";

29 38 "8"; 5B 5D

"1";

7B

7D

"1";

7E

U)"; UO"

01 "HP logo"; 16

7E

"0"

"PI;

41 "A"; 51

"Q";

57 "W"; 61 "a"; 71 "q"; 77 "w";

NOTE: HEX character equivalents appear in quotation marks.

Figure

5-1

8.

Boundary Characters

Wrap Around.

The user needs to be aware of a phenomenon called "wrap around". If one or more

vectors are drawn outside the vector drawing area, the display will draw vectors on opposite sides of

the CRT. One part of the vector will be at one side of the screen while the other part of the vector will be

drawn on the opposite side of the CRT. The picture will appear distorted with visible vectors

connecting ends of the vectors This can be corrected by plotting inside the 1345A vector drawing

area.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 5-Display Control Group

BOUNDARY FOR 2.5X

BOUNDARY FOR ZX

18

Figure

5-1

9.

Character Borders

bit commands and refreshes the CRT thus relieving the

The 1345A Memory Option stores up to

4k,

16

user processor of data storage and CRT refresh requirements. The vector memory will appear to the

user processor as a single memory location. The memory option recognizes two commands for

programming. These commands are for data transfer and memory address pointer manipulation. A

data transfer is either a read from or a write to the vector memory. Address pointer operations are used

for positioning the data in the vector memory list and selecting a desired memory read address.

The vector memory contains a 4k by 16 bit memory, a 60 hz refresh timer, and two address pointersfor

-- ~I?p-mwu~~~&~~+y&+&

-

.-

=

h

,

,&T&Ls

ap

t~mer, when enabled will display the contents of the vector memory approximately once every 16.67

ms. There is a jumper on the memory board that allows the user to initiate the refresh cycle from an

external source. This would be used to synchronize the refresh cycle with the user instrument data

transfers or to refresh the display at a frequency other than 60

hz.

There are two pointers used to control access of data to and from the vector memory. One of these

pointers is called the refresh pointer. It is enabled at the start of a refresh cycle and starts sequencing

through vector memory until the end of memory is reached or an internal jump to4095 is encountered.

This is an internal memory address pointer that the user cannot access. The other pointer is called the

Vector Memory Address pointer. This pointer is used to control data access to the vector memory.

This pointer may be positioned by user commands for data transfer into and out of the vector memory

list. In either case, an important fact is, that after a read or write operation the address of this pointer

will increment by one.

pr-

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6

The purpose of this chapter is to explain the bus-only control and communication group of

commands. The topics covered here are:

Service Requests

& Instrument

Status

The status byte

The instrument status register

The activity status register

Labeling user SRQs

Power-on SRQ

Reading sweep points

Ready status

Source fault status

Reference locked status

Measurement done status

Missed sample status

Overflow status

Identify query

Revision query

Serial number query

Setup state transfer

HP-IB trigger enable

Passing control

Error code query

Reading Marker

Values

X

marker

Individual special markers

Grouped special markers

Front Panel

Reading Markers knob movement

Writing to the message field

Controlling display updating

Reading auto carrier values

Controlling HP logo for plotting

Most of the topics in this chapter are also discussed in condensed format in Appendix

B,

"Quick Reference Guide."

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-Cornrnand/Cornmunication

Group

SERVICE REQUESTS AND INSTRUMENT STATUS

The service request (SRQ) is sent by the HP 3562A to gain the attention of the system control-

ler. The SRQ is generated by conditions in the status byte (see the next section). When the

HP

3562A issues an SRQ (activates the SRQ line), it also sets bit

#6

in the status byte. This is

the Require Service (RQS) bit, sometimes referred to asthe "status bit" in connection with a

poll.

An SRQ is sent for two general reasons: either the analyzer needs control of the bus, or there is

some change in its internal status that the controller may be interested in.

The

HP

3562A generates SRQs at three levels. First, true conditions in the status byte directly

send the SRQ. Second, true conditions in the instrument status register (IS) indirectly generate

SRQs through the status byte. Third, conditions in the activity status (AS) register indirectly

generate SRQs through the IS then through the status byte.

Your controller's program doesn't necessarily have to be interrupt-driven. Any status condition

read directly. Table 6-1 summarizes the or event capable of sending an

SRQ

can also be

available status checks and how you can read them with a controller. The "Command" col-

umn shows the checks that have dedicated HP-IB commands.

. .

Programming

for

Service

Requests

In many applications, the controller program will be written so that it stops execution and polls

all instruments on the bus when it receives an SRQ. A program written to perform serial polls

dumps an entire status byte from each instrument and checks the status bit to detect which

instrument requires service. When the instrument requesting service is identified, the reason for

the SRQ can be found by decoding the status byte. Any unmasked status bits and conditions

can initiate an SRQ. RESET and DEVICE CLEAR reset all masks in the status byte, instrument

status and activity status registers.

As mentioned earlier, your program does not have to be interrupt-driven: every conditionlevent

listed in table

6-1

can be read without waiting for an SRQ. The scheme you should take, waiting

-@~ntwp&m&gsW~epm~~6~pI~.

--

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERYiCE REQUESTS

AND INSTRUMENT

STATUS

Table

6-1

Summary

of

Status Checks

in

the

HP

3562A

Status

Byte

Wherelhew

to

read

it

IS

ConditionlEvent

Requested service

Error generated

Ready for HP-IB

commands

User SRQs

End of disc action

End of plot action

Power up

Key pressed

Various plotter

&

disc requests

Instrument status

change

Measurement pause

Auto sequence pause

End of measurement,

capture or throughput

Sweep point ready

Channel 1 over range

Channel

2

over range

Channel 1 half scale

Channel

2

half scale

Source fault

Reference locked

Marker knob turned

Entry knob turned

Activity status change

System failure

Filling time record

Filters settling

Curve fit in progress

Missed external sample

Timed preview active

Data accepted

Waiting for trigger

Waiting for arm

Ramping source

Diagnostic in progress

Marker calc in progress

Identify

Revision

Send setup state

as

Command

ERR?

RDY?

KEY?

*

*

IS?

SMSD

SSWP

SOVl

SOV2

SFLT

RLOK

AS?

SMSP

*

*

*

*

*

ID?

REV?

SET?

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT

STATUS

The status byte is an &bit byte that provides information about the analyzer's current inter-

action with the bus. It provides 35 conditions, each with a unique code. All conditions are

capable of generating SRQs. Some of the conditions can be masked, which prevents them

from sending an SRQ, regardless of their current state. For example, if the "key pressed"

condition is enabled (unmasked) and a key is pressed on the front panel, reading the status

byte indicates that it was indeed the key pressed condition that generated the SRQ.

Table 6-2 shows the eight bits in the

HP

3562A's status byte. The status byte is read by serial

polling the analyzer (which also clears the status byte). Five of these bits are encoded; refer to

table 6-3 for the condition codes.

Table

6-2

The

HP

35628's

Status Byte

Bit

7

Value

128

Description

see table 6-3

RQS

(HP 3562A requested

service)

5

32

ERR

(HP-IB error)

RDY

(ready to accept HP-IB

commands)

3

2

1

0

8

4

see table 6-3

see table 6-3

see table 6-3

see table 6-3

2

1

occurs when the command buffer is empty. The

HP-IB

command buffer has a capacity of

three 80-byte command lines where a byte represents one character, and a line is defined

to be terminated by a line-feed or activation of the EOI (End Or Identify) bus management

line (carriage returns are ignored).

ERR (bit 5) is set when the instrument encounters an error condition and is cleared when the

error register is read by the controller with the ERR? query command. Refer to "Error Codes"

later in this section to decode the number returned with ERR?.

RQS (bit 6) is set when the analyzer activates the SRQ bus management line and is cleared

when the controller serial polls the

HP

3562A for its status byte.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT STATUS

Table

6-3

shows the condition codes represented by bits

7,3,2,1

and

0

in

the status byte.

Table

6-3

Status Byte Condition Codes

Status bit

Numbers

73210

Status

Byte

Value

Description

No service requested

User SRQ

#I

User SRQ

#2

User SRQ

#3

User SRQ #4

User SRQ

#5

User SRQ

#6

User SRQ

#7

User SRQ

#8

End of disc action

End of plot action

Instrument status change

Power up

Key pressed

Device Clear Plotter, Listen HP

3562A

Unaddress Bus, Listen HP

3562A

Talk plotter, Listen HP

3562A

Talk disc execution. Listen HP

3562A

Talk disc report, Listen HP

3562A

Talk Amigo disc command, Listen HP

3562A

Talk Amigo disc data, Listen HP

3562A

Talk Amigo short status, Listen HP

3562A

Talk disc identify, Listen

HP

3562A

Talk Amigo parallel poll, Listen HP

3562A

Listen Plotter. Talk HP

3562A

Listen disc command, Talk HP

3562A

Listen disc execution, Talk HP

3562A

- - --

--an&&&-

Listen

mig go

disc data, Talk

HP

3562A

Listen Amigo disc read, Talk HP

3562A

Listen Amigo disc write, Talk HP

3562A

Listen Amigo disc format, Talk HP

3562A

00000

00001

0001 0

0001 1

00100

001 01

001 10

001 11

01000

01001

01010

0101 1

01 100

01101

01110

01111

10000

10001

1001 0

1001 1

10100

101 01

101 10

10111

11 000

11 001

11010

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

I28

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

I36

137

138

s-t

--

11100

11101

11110

11 11 1

140

141

142

143

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS

AND

iNSTRUMEWT STATUS

Condition 0 indicates that no service was requested and it was not the

HP

3562A that sent

the SRQ. Conditions 1-8 are the eight USER SRQ softkeys (see "Labeling User SRQs" later

in this section). Condition

9

indicates that disc action under the analyzer's control is finished;

10 shows the same thing for a plotter. Condition 11 is the "window" into the instrument status

(IS) register; any change in the IS register sets this condition. Condition 12 is set if the PwrSRQ

ON OFF softkey (in the

SPCL

FCTN

menu) is ON and power is applied to the analyzer. Con-

dition 13 is set if key code monitoring is enabled and a key on the analyzer's front panel

is pressed. Conditions 14,15 and 128-143 are provided for controllers incapable of passing

control; refer to "Passing Control" later in this chapter.

The status byte can indicate up to three conditions simultaneously:

1. Occurrence of an error with ERR (bit 5)

2.

Readiness to accept more commands with

RDY

(bit

4)

3. One of the 32 other conditions (bits 7,3,2,1,0)

The analyzer remembers one status condition beyond the one shown in the status byte.

For example, assume the power-on and key pressed conditions are both enabled, and

you power on and press a key. If you then read the status byte, it indicates the power-on SRQ

(which occurred first). Since reading the status byte this time clears it, reading it again shows

the key pressed condition. This queuing applies only to conditions 1-12. When conditions 13-143

are set, they must be serviced and cleared before the analyzer can continue.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-CommandlComniunication

Group

SERVICE REQUESTS AND INSTRUMENT STATUS

Masking

the

Status

When a condition is "masked," it is prevented from generating an SRQ when it becomes

true. At power-on, all conditions except the power-on SRQ are masked (disabled), but it is

a good idea to explicitly mask and unmask conditions as needed. Masking a condition does

not prevent it from occurring, nor does it prevent the condition code from being set. Table 6-4

summarizes status byte masking.

Table

6-4

Masking Status

Byte

Conditions

Condition

0

1-8

9-10

11

12

13

14-15

16 (RDY)

32 (ERR)

64 (RQS)

128-143

How

to

Mask

not maskable (never generates an

SRQ)

not maskable

masked with

SRQD;

unmasked with

SRQE

masked with ISMn, where n is decimal equivalent of the bits

in the IS register to be unmasked. This bit

is completely

masked by sending ISMO.

masked with

PSRQO;

unmasked with

PSRQI

masked with

KEYD;

unmasked with

KEYE

not maskable

masked with

RDYD;

unmasked with

RDYE

masked with

ERRD;

unmasked with

ERRE

not maskable (never generates an

SRQ)

not maskable

Conditions

9

and 10 are unmasked with SRQE (optional service request enable) and masked

with SRQD (optional service request disable). Condition 11 is maskedlunmasked indirectly

with ISMn (instrument status mask). Refer to "Masking the IS Register" later in this section

for details. The point here is that unmasking at least one bit in the IS register automatically

unmasks condition 11 in the status byte. Condition 12 is masked by pressing PwrSRQ

ON OFF

to

OFF

(or sending PSRQO over the bus) and unmasked by pressing it

ON

(or sending PSRQ1

over the bus). Condition 13 is masked with KEYD (key code disable) and unmasked with

KEYE

(key code enable). Condition 16 (the RDY bit) is masked with RDYD (ready SRQ disable) and

SRQs are generated only by the status byte; the instrument status (IS) and activity status (AS)

registers must generate SRQs indirectly through the status byte. The IS register can generate

an SRQ if condition 11 in the status byte is enabled. The AS register is twice removed: bit 13 of

the IS register and condition 11 of the status byte must be enabled for the AS to generate an

SRQ.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-Cornmand/Communication

Group

SERVICE REQUESTS AND iWSTRUMENT STATUS

Unlike the status byte, which shows the analyzer's current interaction with the bus, the instru-

ment status (IS) register shows various conditions of the analyzer's internal status. The IS

register does not generate SRQs (at least not directly). True conditions in the IS set condition

11 in the status byte, which in turn sends the SRQ.

Table 6-5 shows the instrument status (IS) register. The contents of the IS are read by

sending the IS? command (which also clears the register). Unlike the status byte, the IS is

not encoded: each bit represents a single conditionlevent. Remember that condition 11 in

the status byte must be enabled (unmasked) before the IS can indirectly generate an SRQ.

Status Register Table

6-5

Instrument

Bit

Value

Measurement pause

Auto sequence pause

End of measurement, capture or

throughput

End of auto sequence

Sweep point ready

Channel

1

over range

Channel

2

over range

Channel

1

half range

Channel

2

half range

Source fault

1

=

yes

0

=

no

Reference unlocked

.Remote marker knob turn

Remote entry knob turn

activity status register change

Power-on test failed

Bit 0 is set when the measurement has been paused, either from the front panel or via HP-IB.

. . . .

--

1s

c~t-wbbw ~

v

as^&

capture, or throughput ends. For averaged measurements, this is at the completion of the last

average. When averaging is off, it is set after each measurement. Bit 3 is set when an auto

sequence is finished. Bit

4

is set when the analyzer is in the swept sine mode and a sweep

point is ready. Bits 5-6 can be set only when a measurement, capture, or throughput is in

progress. Bits 7-8 are set if the signal reaches half-range at least once during the measure-

when a source fault occurs that causes the source to supply more than 12 ment. Bit

9

indicates

volts. Bit 10 indicates whether the analyzer is locked to the external reference signal (at the EXT

REF

IN

rear panel connector). Bits 11 and 12 indicate that the Markers and Entry knobs,

respectively, have been moved. Bit 13 indicates a change in the activity status register. Bit 14 is

set if the power-on self test fails.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication

Group

SERVICE REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT STATUS

Most of these bits have corresponding HP-IB commands. Bits

0

and

2

works with SMSD; refer

to "Measurement Done Status" later in this section. Bit 4 works with SSWP; refer to "Sending

Sweep Points" later in this section. Bits 5-6 work with SOVl and SOV21; refer to "Overflow

Status" later in this section. Bit

9

works with SFLT; refer to "Source Fault Status" later in this

chapter. Bit 10 works with RLOK; refer to "Reference Lock status" later in this section. Bits 11

and 12 work with the remote knob commands; refer to "Communicating with the Front Panel"

later in this chapter.

Masking

the

lnstrurment Status

Register

Bits in the IS are masked with the lSMn command, where n is the decimal equivalent of the

sum of the values of the bits to be unmasked. For example, the BASIC statement

OUTPUT 720;"1SM20"

unmasks bit 2 (value

=

4) and bit 4 (value =16), and masks all other bits. Remember that at

least one bit in the IS must be unmasked to unmask condition 11 in the status byte. At power-

on, the IS mask defaults to all bits masked. You can read the current masking of the IS register

with the ISM? query:

OUTPUT 720;"ISM?"

ENTER 720;IS-mask

PRINT IS-mask

Bit

4

(sweep point ready) can also be masked with DSWQ (disable sweep SRQ) and

unmasked with ESWQ (enable sweep SRQ). Bit 11 (remote marker knob turn) can be masked

with RMKD (remote marker knob disable) and unmasked with RMKE (remote marker knob

enable). Bit 12 can be masked with REND (remote entry knob disable) and unmasked with

remote RENE (remote entry knob enable).

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-CommandlCommunication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS AND INSTRUMENT STATUS

The status query command (STA?) provides some information from both the status byte and

the instrument status register. Sending STA? causes the HP 3562A to return the 16-bit word

shown in table 6-6. Note that STA? does not clear the information shown in these bits.

Table

6-6

The

STA?

Word

Bit

Value

Not used

Not used

Key pressed

Not used

RDY

ERR

RQS

Message on screen

Measurement pause

Auto sequence pause

End of measurement

End of auto sequence

Sweep point ready

Channel

1

over range

Channel

2

over range

Math overflow

The only unique information provided by STA? is the message on screen indicator (bit

7).

This

is set when a message is displayed in the message field on the screen. This field is the second

line from the bottom on the right side. Messages appear in half-bright upper and lower case.

To read the message, send the display message query command (DSP?), which returns up to

ENTER 720;Status

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-CommandlCommunication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT STATUS

"Ie

Activity

Status

We

The activity status (AS) register indicates several aspects of the

HP

3562A's current activity.

It generates SRQs through the IS register, then through the the status byte. Unlike the status

byte and IS, reading the AS register with AS? does not erase it. The AS register indicates

events, as opposed to conditions. Consequently, it is possible to receive an

SRQ

caused

by the AS, then find the register empty when you read it with AS?. Keep this in mind when

programming for AS-based interrupts.

Table 6-7 shows the activity status (AS) register. The contents of the AS are read by sending

the AS? command (which also clears the register). Unlike the status byte and like the IS, the

AS is not encoded: each bit represents a single condition. Remember that both bit 13 of the

IS and condition

11

of the status byte must be enabled before the AS can indirectly generate

an SRQ.

Table

6-7

Activity Status Register

Bit

Value Event

Check fault log

Filling time record

Filters settling

Curve fit in progress

Missed sample (when in external sample)

Timed preview

Accept data

Waiting for trigger

Waiting for arm

not used

Ramping source

Diagnostic in progress

Marker calc in progress

Use these event indicators to monitor the analyzer's activity after assigning tasks to it. Bit

0

Snbimhmmrwinsidrrtm~rterdhntat

-..--

~T~ieTaulr-

log is intended for use by trained service people only; refer to the

UP

3562A

Service

Manual

for details. Bit

1

indicates that the time record is being filled, which becomes more noticeable

as the frequency span decreases (increasing the time record length). Bit 3 indicates that a

curve fit is in progress. Bit

4

indicates that a sample was missed while in external sampling

because the external sampling frequency is too high. Bits 5 and 6 are used with previewing

in the linear resolution mode. Bit 5 indicates that the analyzer is paused for a time preview,

and bit

6

tells whether or not the last time record was accepted. Bits 7 and

8

indicate that the

analyzer is waiting for the trigger signal or manual arming, respectively. Bit

9

indicates that the

that the source is being ramped. Bit

11

indi- calibration routine is in progress. Bit

10

indicates

cates that a service diagnostic is in progress. Finally, bit 12 indicates that a special marker

calculation is in progress.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-Cornmand/Comrnunication

Group

SERVICE

REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT STATUS

Because it monitors events, the AS must be masked for the positive-going or the negative-

going transition of each bit. Two commands are used to mask the AS register. ASMHn

unmasks the bits equal to n as they change from low to high

(0

to 1). ASMLn unmasks the bits

The current masking of the AS can be read as they change from high to low (I to

0).

with the ASML? and ASMH? queries:

OUTPUT 720;"ASML?"

ENTER 720;ASM-low

OUTPUT 720;"ASMH?"

ENTER 720;ASM-high

PRINT ASM-low,ASM-high

As an example of AS masking, the BASIC statements

OUTPUT 720;"ISM8192"

OUTPUT 720;"ASML8"

detect when a curve fit currently in progress finishes. The ISM8192 unmasks two conditions

simultaneously: by unmasking at least one bit in the IS, it unmasks condition 11 in the status

byte (instrument status change); and by unmasking bit 13 in the IS, it allows changes in the

AS register to be communicated to the IS register. The second statement, ASML8, unmasks

bit 8 in the AS (curve fit in progress) for its transition from high to low. While the curve fit is in

progress, bit

8

is high; as soon as the fit ends, bit 8 drops low. This in turn sets bit 13 in the IS,

which then sets condition 11 in the status byte and sends the SRQ. The flowchart in figure 6-1

summarizes these actions.

UNMASK BIT 13

IN INSTRUMENT

STATUS REGISTER

CHANGE BIT

8

IN THE ACTIVITY STATUS

FROM HIGH TO LOW

SETCONDITION 11

IN THE STATUS BYTE

INDICATING TRUE CONDITION

(BlT13) IN THE INSTRUMENT

STATUS

GENERATE SRQ

BECAUSE THERE IS AN

UNMASKED TRUE CONDITION

BIT11) IN THE

.&us

BYTE

Figure

GI

Example of Activity Status Masking

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-CommandlCornmunication

Group

SERVICE REQUESTS AND INSTRUMENT

STATUS

The HP 3562A offers a special class of interrupts called user SRQs. These allow you to initiate

the SRQ whenever you want to, rather than depending on the device to issue one when it

needs to. Under the HP-IB FCTN key; there is a softkey labeled USER SRQ. This softkey

displays a menu containing the USER SRQl through USER SRQ8 softkeys. You can label

each of these softkeys and individually detect the eight user SRQs. This feature has exten-

sive implications: by utilizing the user SRQ softkeys, you can run the controller in the "back-

ground'' while operating the analyzer from its front panel softkeys. You can create an entire

menu structure by redefining the USER SRQ menu with the controller program. Labels are

saved in nonvolatile memory and are not affected by power-down or preset.

To label the USER SRQ softkeys, use the LBSI-LBS8 commands. Labels can be one or two

lines, with a maximum of six characters per line. The label must be enclosed in single or

double quote marks, and if two lines are labeled, they must be separated by a comma. For

example, the BASIC statement:

OUTPUT 720;"LBS4'TWO,LINES"'

labels the USER SRQ4 softkey as

TWO

LINES

Labels can contain letters, numbers, and any punctuation that does not affect command

syntax. Lines with fewer than six characters are automatically centered. Refer to "The Status

Byte" earlier in this chapter for handling the SRQs generated by user SRQs. An example

program written in BASIC 3.0 that labels and handles all eight user SRQs is provided in the

Introductory Programming Guide in Appendix A.

y setting the PwrSRQ ON OFF softkey in the SPCL FCTN menu to ON, you can command

0

o sena an

s

w en

I

in nonvolatile memory in the analyzer, so it is not affected by power-down or reset. The power-

on SRQ is detected as condition 12 in the status byte; see "The Status Byte" earlier in the

chapter for information on decoding the status byte.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT STATUS

eading

Sweep

Points

(SSWP)

When the HP 3562A is measuring in the swept sine mode, you can read each sweep point via

HP-IB. This allows you to write your own auto adjustments programs, for example. The send

sweep point command (SSWP) is used in conjunction with the sweep point ready condition

(bit 4) in the instrument status register.

The general procedure for reading the sweep points is:

1.

Enable the sweep point ready bit in the instrument

status register using ESWQ or enable the sweep point ready SRQ with ISM.

2.

Start the sweep.

3.

Wait for the SRQ interrupt.

4. Decode the status byte and instrument status register to

verify that the sweep is indeed ready.

5. Tell the analyzer to send the sweep point using SSWP.

6.

Go back to step

3

and wait for the next point.

7. Disable sweep point with DSWQ when finished.

An alternative to the interrupt-driven method is reading the IS register in

a

loop, which would

replace steps 3 and

4.

SSWP returns five variables, in the following order:

Input power

Output Power

Cross spectrum real part

Cross spectrum imaginarv part

Frequency

The first four are floating point real variables, and frequency is long floating point. An example

program written in HP BASIC 3.0 that reads sweep points and displays them on the controller's

CRT is provided in the Introductory Programming Guide in Appendix A.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

SEWlCE

REQUESTS

AND

iNSTRUMENT

STATUS

Chapter

6-Cornmand/Cornmunication

Group

eady

Status

Query

(W

The ready status query (RDY?) indicates whether or the not the analyzer's HP-IB command

buffer is full. It returns either a 1 (buffer is empty) or a 0 (buffer has some commands). The

HP 3562A always returns a1 in response to the RDY? query. Use the RDY bit in

the status byte if you need to monitor the command buffer.

The HP-IB command buffer can store three lines of 80 bytes each.

A

line is defined to be

terminated by a line feed command or activation of the EOI bus management line. Commands

can be queued in the buffer, and they are processed as soon as they are received. When the

buffer is full, the HP-IB handshaking sequence forces the controller to wait.

Source FzruBt Status (SFLT)

The source fault status query (SFLT) returns

a

1

if a failure in the source is causing it to supply

over

12

volts.

A

0 is returned when the source level is in its normal operating range.

Reference Locked Status

(WBOK)

The reference locked status command (RLOK) indicates whether or not the analyzer is

locked to an external reference signal (applied to the EXT REF IN rear panel connector).

A

1

is returned if it is locked, a 0 if not. This command provides the same information as bit 10

in the instrument status register.

Measurement

Done

Status (SMS

The measurement done status command (SMSD) indicates if a measurement, capture or

throughput is in progress. SMSD returns a1 if the measurement, capture

or

throughput is done

Missed

Sample

Status (SMSP)

The missed sample status command (SMSP) indicates if the analyzer missed a sample while in

external sampling. This is caused by an external sample rate greater than 256 kHz.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS AND INSTRUMENT STATUS

The send overflow status commands (SOVI and SOV2) return a

I

if an overrange occurred in

if not. ~hese flags are set only during a measurement and are

the last measurement, and a

0

cleared only by reading.

Identify

Query

(I

This query (ID?) is used to identify devices on the bus. The

HP

3562A responds to ID? by

returning the -/-character string "HP3562A."

This query

(REV?)

identifies the revision code of the software contained and the instrument and

code and format convention revision to which the software is written. For example, the BASIC

statements:

OUTPUT

720;

"REV?"

ENTER

720;

Software, Format

PRINT

Software, Format

Provide the software and format codes.

Serial

Number

Query

(SER?)

This command is a partial implementation of the serial number query. The

HP

3562A

responds to it returning a 10-character string: prefix

(4

numbers indicating the date of the

analyzer's introduction), country of manufacture (A for USA), and 5 zeros. Individual instru-

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERVICE REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT

STATUS

Setup

State

Transfer

(

The SET? command dumps the current instrument state in the ANSI floating point format.

The SET command loads a state that has been previously dumped with SET? back into the

analyzer. SET? is interchangeable with the DSAN (Dump State in ANsi) command, and SET

is interchangeable with the LSAN (Load State in ANsi) command. Please refer to Chapter

3

for information on using DSAN and LSAN.

er

Enable

(HPT)

In addition to the triggering modes selectable from the front panel, the analyzer can also be

triggered via HP-IB. To do this, you first need to select HP-IB triggering by sending the HPT

command. Once HPT is sent, the analyzer can respond to the HP-IB bus management com-

mand "TRIGGER."

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

SERViCE REQUESTS

AND

iMSTRUMENT STATUS

Passing

Control

The HP 3562A is capable of controlling the bus so that it can control plotters, access disc

drives and output command strings. When it needs control of the bus, the most efficient

method is to:

1. Send the CTAD command (controller address) to the HP 3562A telling it where to

pass control back to when it is finished.

2. Send the command that requires the analyzer to have control of the bus; STPL

(START PLOT), for example.

3. Wait for the analyzer to issue an SRQ saying its needs control of the bus.

4. Pass control to the analyzer. This is a controller-dependent operation; HP BASIC

for this purpose.

3.0 provides the PASS

CONTROL

command

5. Wait for the HP 3562A to send a second SRQ saying it is finished with the bus.

You can, of course, have the controller continue its program without waiting for the

analyzer to release control of the bus if regaining control, is not important. In any

case, the HP 3562A automatically passes control back to the controller specified

by CTAD when

it no longer needs it.

The Introductory Programming Guide in Appendix A provides two examples of passing

control, one for plotter control and one for. sharing a disc drive with a controller.

If your controller is incapable of passing control, use status byte conditions 14,15 and 128-143

to detect when each device on the bus needs to talk and listen. Then explicitly address and

unaddress each device as needed to complete the data transfer. Your controller's HP-IB docu-

mentation should explain its use of the HP-IB secondary commands needed to do this.

A troubleshooting hint: if your controller grabs control of the bus before the HP 3562A is

finished, see if some other device on the bus is sending an inadvertent SRQ. Such an SRQ

Time-Out

Control

To enable time-out control, send TMOE. This causes the

HP

3562A to abort bus activity if it

has control and a device under its control does not respond to a command after -5s. To

disable time-out, send TMOD. TMOE is the default.

Error Codes

The Error query (ERR?) returns the error code of the last HP-IB error. Each error code has a

corresponding description in table 6-9. Note that these are the same errors as those encoun-

tered in front panel operation. For complete descriptions, with suggested corrective actions,

refer to Appendix B of the

UP 3562A

Operating

Manual,

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

SERVICE

REQUESTS

AND

INSTRUMENT

STNUS

Chapter 6-CommandlCommunication Group

Table

6-9

Error

Codes

Code

Error

No Peak Avg in HIST Meas

No Peak Avg in CORR Meas

Freq Resp, No

1

Ch Demod

Cross Corr, No

1

Ch Demod

No fundamental

X

Marker Must Be Active

Buffer Overflow

No Coord Change Allowed

Not In Frequency Domain

No Data

Code

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

300

3 01

302

303

304

305

306

307

308

309

400

401

402

403

500

600

601

602

603

604

605

606

607

608

Error

Not Active Softkey

Unknown Mnemonic

Line Too Long

Command Too Long

Alpha Delimiter Expected

Not A Valid Terminator

Extra Chars In Command

Function Inactive

Missing lnput

Not Valid Units

Not A Valid Number

Alpha Too Long

Number Too Long

Out Of Range

Unable To Curve Fit

Bad

#

Of Parameters

Auto Carrier Selected

ENTRY Not Enabled

Not A Valid Block Length

Not A Valid Block Mode

Not HP-IB Controller

HP-IB Time Out

Bad Plotter Data Read

Cannot Recall Throughput

Not A Valid Catalog

Unformatted Disc

Catalog Full

Not A Valid Name

Not A Valid Display

File Not Found

Disc Full

Unknown Disc command Set

No Disc In Drive

Disc Write Protected

Disc Fault

Disc Transfer Error

No Spares Or Fault Areas

No Thruput File

Catalog Not In Memory

File Size Not Specified

Select Capture To Recall

Source

=

Destination

Sector Size

< >

256

Bytes

Not Valid Format Option

Not Valid For This Disc

Destination Too Small

Measurement In Progress

Trace Not Compatible

Data Type Incompatible

Data Blocks Incompatible

Source Block Empty

User Display Not Enabled

No Active Display Buffer

Recursive Call

Not A Valid Auto Math

Bad Setup State

Bad Auto Sequence Table

Bad Synth Table

Bad Non-Volatile State

Bad Data Block

Bad Data Header

Marker Not On

No Valid Marker Units

No Capture Data

No Thruput Data

Thruput Data Too Long

Bad Curve Fit Table

Bad Capture

Not A valid User Window

Bad Primitive Block

View lnput Disabled

Cannot Use Zoom Data

Already Running

May Be Inaccurate

Cannot Be Complex

Bad Delete Freq Table

Loops Nested Too Deep

Demod In Zoom Only

Numeric Overflow

Invalid: NyquistlNichols

Invalid: Log Data

No Carrier

No Peak Hold In Time Avg

Calibration In Progess

No Avg in Demod Hist

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-Comrnand/Communication

Group

READING

MARKER VALUES

The HP 3562A allows you to read the

X

marker and the slope and power special marker

functions via HP-IB. (The Y marker is not tied to display data, so there is little value in reading

it over the bus.) This section explains the commands used for these functions and the data

they provide. The Introductory Programming Guide in Appendix A has a example program

in HP BASIC

3.0

that reads all three marker values. Note that before reading marker values,

you should explicitly sd the units and coordinates in which you want the trace to be calculated.

Reading

the

X

Marker (WDM

The read marker command (RDMK) returns two long floating-point numbers: the x-axis

("X

=

")and y-axis ("Ya

=

"

or "Yb

=

")

values of the

X

marker. The following BASIC statements

read the

X

marker:

OUTPUT 720; "RDMK"

ENTER 720; X,Ya

PRINT "X= ";X,"Ya= ";Ya

Weadlwg

the

Special

Marker

Once

(RSMO)

The read special marker once command (RSMO) returns the value of the POWER, FREQ &

DAMP or AVG VALUE special marker function, whichever one was pressed last for each trace.

This is a long floating point value and is scaled in the current display coordinates and units. The

following BASIC statements read whichever of these marker functions is active:

OUTPUT 720; "RSMO"

ENTER 720; MarkerVala, Marker-Valb

PRINT MarkerVal

The read special marker group command (RSMG) returns the value of the SLOPE, HMNC

POWER, THD or SBAND POWER special marker function, whichever one is active for each

trace. This is a long floating point value and is scaled in the current units and coordinates. The

following BASIC statements read the SLOPE marker:

OUTPUT 720; "RSMG"

ENTER 720; Slope

a,

Slope b

PRINT Slope

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-CommandlComrnunication Group

COUMUNICBSING

WITH

THE FRONT

PANEL

The rest of this chapter shows you how to communicate with the analyzer's front panel: keys,

eight softkeys, and two knobs. The end of this section shows you how to write messages to the

message field and control display updating.

Each key and the eight generic softkeys are assigned key code. You can use these codes in

two ways: monitor key presses by interpreting key codes, and simulate key presses by sending

key codes to the analyzer.

There are four commands used with this feature. KEY? is a query that returns the key code

of the last key pressed since power-up or reset (if KEYE has been sent previously). KEYn

sends a key code, where n is the code from

1

to 70, to the analyzer. And there are two

commands used for masking/unmasking the key pressed condition in the status byte. KEYD

masks (disables) the condition, and KEYE unmasks it.

Table 6-10 lists the HP 3562A's key codes. Note that the eight softkey buttons have unique

codes, but individual softkey labels do not. The code of the last key pressed (since power-up

or reset) is returned by the KEY? command. Key presses are simulated by sending the ana-

lyzer the KEYn command, where n is the code of the key to be simulated. The key buffer holds

the last three key presses.

COM? returns the HP-IB command of the last key pressed (this is

useful for detecting softkeys).

Table

6-10

Key Codes

Key Name

No Key Pressed

ENGR UNITS

INPUT COUPLE

TRIG DELAY

HP-IB FCTN

9EC

SELECT TRIG

CAL

RANGE

AVG

SELECT M EAS

WINDOW

LOCAL

PLOT

SOURCE

FREQ

MEAS MODE

START

SPCL FCTN

PRESET

MATH

SYNTH

AUTO SEQ

Code

0

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

2 1

22

.

36

Softkey 4

Softkey 5 37

Softkey 2 38

39 Softkey 1 (top)

@

Key Name Code

/

5

6

4

Softkey 7

Softkey 6

1

3

2

MARKER VALUE

-

(negative sign)

4 1

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

BACKSPACE 5 1

Softkey 8 (bottom) 52

VIEW INPUT 53

0 54

, (comma) 55

A

.

(decimal point)

56

57

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-Command/Communication Group

COMMUNICATlNG WITH

THE FRONT

PANEL

Table

6-10

(Continued)

PAUSE CONT

SAVE RECALL

Y

B

A&B

COORD

SPCL MARKER

HELP

AUTO MATH

CURVE FIT

X

OFF

X

Y

OFF

8

9

7

MEAS DlSP

ARM

SINGLE

UPPER LOWER

STATE TRACE

UNITS

FRONT BACK

SCALE

UP arrow

DOWN arrow

Weeding

Entry

Knob

Mowemelat

The rotary pulse generator (RPG) knob in the Entry group can be addressed via HP-18.

You can use the knob to generate SRQs or use it to send numeric values to the controller.

To set up the knob in the Entry group to generate SRQs as it is rotated, you need use the

instrument status register. Bit 12 in this register is used to indirectly generate the SRQ; refer

to "The Instrument Status Register" earlier in this chapter.

32 767. To program its value, use the RENV

The knob has a numeric range of -32 768 to

+

command (remote entry knob value). To read its current value, use the RENV? query. The

Entry knob has variable acceleration, which you set with the RENS (Remote Entry Knob

Speed) command. RENSO, 32767: specifies fixed acceleration, and RENSI, 32767 specifies

variable acceleration. Use RENE to enable remote entry, or REND to disable it.

The Markers group knob can also be addressed via

HP-IB.

This knob uses bit I1 in the

instrument status register. Addressing the Markers knob is similar to addressing the Entry

knob; the difference is that the acceleration of the Markers knob is fixed. To program its value,

use the RMKV command (remote markers knob value). To read its current value, use the

RMKV? query. Send RMKE to enable remote markers, RMKD to disable. When remote mark-

ers are enabled, the

X

and Y marker values should not be set.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter

6-Cornrnand/Communication

Group

COMMUNICATING

WITH

THE

FRONT

PANEL

Writing

to

the

Message

You can write messages up to

24

characters long to the displays message field. Use the DSP

command and put the message string in single quotes. For example, the BASIC statement:

OUTPUT 720;"DSPiHi

Mom'."

Display "Hi

Mom"

(without quotes) in the message field. To read the message currently in the

field, use the DSP? query, which returns an alphanumeric string up to

24

characters long. For

example:

OUTPUT 720; "DSP?"

ENTER 720; Message$

PRINT

Message$

Reads and prints the current message. When a measurement is started a "blank message is

displayed, which sets bit

7 of the STA? word.

Controlliing

Display

Updating

Two commands are provided to enableidisable updating on the display. To disable updating,

send the DSPD (display disable) command. To enable it, send DSPE (display enable). Note

that once you send DSPD, updating is disabled until you re-enable it by sending DSPE or

resetting the analyzer.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Chapter 6-CommandiCommunication Group

COMMUNICATING WITH THE

FRONT

PANEL

The values calculated by the demodulation algorithm's auto carrier feature can be read via

HP-IB. The command SACR (Send Auto Carrier) returns four values:

Auto carrier calculated for Channel

1

Auto carrier calculated for Channel 2

Phase offset removed from Channel

1

Phase offset removed from Channel 2

For example, the BASIC statements:

OUTPUT 720; "SACR"

ENTER 720; Carrierl, Carrier2, Phasel, Phase2

return the four values. These values are in floating point format.

Controllling

the

HP Logo for

Plotting

The HP logo that appears at the top of table displays is not normally plotted, but you can

specify it to be plotted if desired. Send the command "LOGOO" to disable it or "LOGOI" to

enable it.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

B

This appendix provides condensed HP-IB programming information for the

HP

3562A

Dynamic Signal Analyzer. It contains the following information in quick reference format:

General command syntax

Response to bus management commands

Command mnemonics, including syntax, limits &terminators

Service requests

Status byte description, including masking

Instrument status register description

Activity status register description

Error codes

Key codes

through

6.

This appendix is intended for

For complete information, please refer to Chapters

1

reference use by programmers familiar with both the HP 3562A and the computer/controller

being used.

The mnemonic list is divided in two parts. The first part contains the front panel (key and

softkey) mnemonics listed al

listed alphabetically.

--

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

GENERAL

COMMAND

SYNTAX

The general syntax for sending commands to the HP 3562A is:

where

<

mnem

>

is the command mnemonic

<

opt sp

>

is ignored optional space

<

para> is first command-dependent parameter

<

sep

>

is required comma

(,)

for multi-parameter commands

<

para> is second command-dependent parameter

<

opt sp

>

is ignored optional space

<

suff

>

is command-dependent suffix

>

is command terminator (semicolon)

For example, to set up a frequency span from 10 to 60 kHz, you would send the command:

FRS 10,60 KHz;

where: FRS

10

is the,mnemonic

is the first command-dependent parameter

is the parameter separator

60 is the second command-dependent parameter

KHz is the command-dependent suffix

is the command terminator

Note that the front panel mnemonics usually emulate the respective key or softkey. In some

cases, suffixes (terminators, delimiters) are not required. The syntax required for every com-

mand is described in the mnemonic table. You should consult this whenever there is a question

about a particular command's syntax.

Parameter

Queries

lo query the current value ot any variaPle parameter, send the appropriate mneriTonlc followed

by a question mark. For example, to learn the current frequency span, send FRS?.

-

--

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

6-Quick

Reference Guide

RESPONSE

TO BUS

MANAGEMENT

COMMANDS

Table

1

summarizes the

HP

3562A's

response to the

HP-IB

primary bus management

commands.

Table

1

Response to Bus Management Commands

Command

ABORT 110

CLEAR LOCKOUT

& SET LOCAL

DEVICE CLEAR

Response

Aborts data input or output and unaddresses the ana-

lyzer. Does not clear the HP-IB command buffer.

Clears local lockout and returns to local control.

Unconditionally interrupts bus activity: clears the HP-

IB command buffer, resets the SRQ line, aborts data

inputloutput, and enters REMOTE mode.

Returns to local (front panel) control and aborts load

operations in progress, but does not abort dump oper-

ations or clear the HP-IB command buffer.

Disables the front panel LOCAL key, but does affect

local/remote status.

Does not respond.'

Does not respond.

Accepts control if needed; passes control back when

finished to address specified by the CTAD command.

Immediately passes control back is it receives control

when it does not need it.

Forces the HP

3562A into the REMOTE mode.

LOCAL

LOCAL LOCKOUT

PARALLEL POLL

PARALLEL POLL

CONFIGURE

PASS CONTROL

REMOTE

TRIGGER

Accepts HP-IB triggering if it is first enabled by send-

ing the analyzer the HPT command.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL COMMANDS

NAME

MNEM

RANGE SUFFIXES SYNTAX

A & B TRACES ABTR

ABTR

A GAIN

ON OFF

A GAIN

SELECT

ABORT CAPTUR

ABORT HPlB

ABORT THRUPT

ACTIVE FILE

ADD

AGON

AGSE

ABCP

ABlB

ABTH

ACFL

ADD

0 or

1

AGONI

=

on

AGONO

=

off

AGFN

ABCP

ABlB

ABTH

alpha

10+38

TRACE A (TRCA)

TRACE B (TRCB)

SAVED

I

(SAVI)

SAVED 2 (SAV2)

ACFL'aaaaaaaa'

ADDrrrr

ADDssss

ADD LINE ADDL see comment

ADDL (auto

sequence; all subse-

quent commands are

entered in asea

MHz,

HZ, KHz ADLNrr,rrss (curve fit

table)

ADD LINE

ADD REG

ADD VALUE

ADDRESS ONLY

AM CHAN 1

AM CHAN 2

ANNOT A PEN

ANNOT B PEN

ARM

ADLN 10+.38

ADDV

ADRS

AM

I

AM2

ANAP

ANBP

ARM

10+38 MHz, HZ, KHz ADDVrr,rrss

ADRS

AM

1

AM2

0-8

0-8

+

+

ANAPrr (number lim-

ited by plotter)

ANBPrr (number lim-

ited by plotter)

ARM

r

=

value within the range specified in the RANGE column

from the SUFFIX collumn s

=

one of the suffixes

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

MNEM RANGE SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

ARMAO

=

manual

ARMAI

=

auto

ASFN

ARM AU MAN

ASEQ FCTN

ASEQ MESSGE

AT POINTR

AUTO 1 RNG UP

AUTO

1

UP&DWN

.

AUTO 2 RNG UP

AUTO 2 UP&DWN

AUTO CORR

AUTO CORRI

AUTO CORR2

AUTO CRRIER

AUTO INTGRT

AUTO

MATH

AUTO MATH

AUTO ON OFF

AUTO ORDER

ARMA

ASFN

ASMS

ATPT

AUl U

AUI

AU2U

AU2

AUCR

AUCI

AU C2

ACRR

AUlN

AMTH

AUMT

AUTO

AUOR

ASEQ

Oor 1

alpha

ASMS'aa. .a' (24 char.

max)

ATPT

AUl U

AU 1

AU2U

AU2

AUCR

AUCl

ACRR

AUlN

AMTH (AUTO

MATH

key)

AUMT (AUTO MATH

softkey)

AUTO0

=

off

AUTO1

=

on

AUOR

ASEQ

AUWT

1-32767 AVGrrrr

AVRG

AVOF

AVGV

AUTO WEIGHT

AVG

AVRG

AVG OFF

AVG VALUE

AU WT

AVG

AVRG

AVOF

AVGV

BEEPER ON OFF

BURST CHIRP

BEEP

BCRP 1-99

BEEP0

=

off

BEEP1

=

on

BCRPrr

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B4uick Reference

Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

BURST RANDOM

CAL

CALCOFF(HMNC)

CALC OFF (SBAND)

CAPTUR HEADER

CAPTUR LENGTH

MNEM

BRND

CAL

CAOF

CLOF

CHED

CLEN

RANGE

1-99

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

BRNDrr

CAL

CAOF

CLOF

CHED

see comment USEC, MSEC, SEC

MIN, REVS, PNTS

REC

(same as CAPTUR LENGTH)

CLENrrss (range

depends on suffix; 10

records or equivalent

limits)

CPNTrrss

CPSE

CAPTUR POlNTR

CAPTUR SELECT

CATLOG POINTR

CDF 1

CDF 2

CENTER FREQ

CPNT

CPSE

CTPT

CDFI

CDF2

CF

1-20 CTPTrr

CDFl

CDF2

see comment MHz, HZ, KHz

ORD, RMP

CFrrss (range limited

to 100 kHz

-

(1 0.24

m

H

2

12)

CHI

CHI 2

CH2

CH 1 ACTIVE

CH 1 &2 ACTIVE

CH 2 ACTIVE

CHAN 1 AC DC

CHAN 1 DELAY

CHI

CHI2

CH2

C1 AC

Cl DL

Oor 1

see comment USEC, MSEC,

SEC, MIN,

REVS, REC

CI AC 0

=

dc

ClAC 1

=

ac

C1 DLrrss (range

depends on suffrx;

-

4095 points and

50 records are

+

-

CHAN

I

INPUT

CHAN 1 RANGE

C1 IN

C1 RG -51 -27 V, MV, VRMS,

MVRM, DBV, EU

C1 IN

Cl RGrrss

(range depends on

suffix; absolute limit is

-

51 to 27 dBV)

+

CHAN 2 AC DC C2AC

C2DL

0 or 1

see comment USEC, MSEC,

SEC, MIN,

REVS, REC

C2DLrrss (range

depends on suffix;

-

4095 points anc!

+

50 records are

absolute limits)

C21N

CHAN 2 DELAY

CHAN 2 INPUT C21N

r

=

value within the range specified inthe

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

CHAN

2

RANGE

MNEM

RANGE

-51

-27

SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

C2RG V, MV, VRMS,

MVRM, DBV, EU

C2RGrrss (range

depends on suffix;

51

absolute limit is

-

to

+

27 dBV

CHGL (for auto

sequences and auto

math; entry is any

valid commamnd)

CHANGE LINE CHGL see comment

CHANGE REGION

CHANGE VALUE

CLEAR ASEQ

CHRG

CHGV

CLAS

0-100

kHz

1oi38

MHz, Hz, KHz

MHz, HZ, KHz

CHRGrr,rrss

CHGVrr,rrss

CLAS (auto sequence

must be displayed

first)

CLLG

CLMA

CLTA (curve fit)

CLTB (synthesis; table

must be displayed

first)

CLRT (delete freq)

COHR

CMPC

CNAS

CNPK

CVTB

CLEAR LOGS

CLEAR MATH

CLEAR TABLE

CLEAR TABLE

CLLG

CLMA

C LTA

CLTB

CLEAR TABLE

COHER

COMPLX CONJ

CONT ASEQ

CONT PEAK

CONVRT TABLE

CLRT

COHR

CMPC

CN AS

CNPK

CVTB

COPY FILES COFl alpha COFl 'aaaaaaaa'

,aaaaaal

COFl'

<

COFI 'aaaaaa,

>'

COFl 'aaa,aaal

CCONrr

CCONrr,rr

CRFT

CREATE CONST

CREATE FIT

CREATE THRUPT

CREATE TRACE

CROSS CORR

CCON

CRFT

CRTH

CTRC

CCOR

10*38

alpha CRTH 'aaaaaaa'

CTRC

CCOR (measurement)

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFJX

column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

B-Quick

Reference

Guide

FRONT

BS

NAME

MNEM

CRCR

CSPC

CRFR

CVFT

CTPG

DSHL

DAAN

DATA

DATE

D B

D BV

DCOF

DEC

DEG

DLTF

DLFR

DLTL

RANGE

SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

CROSS CORR

CROSS SPEC

CRRIER FREQ

CURVE

FIT

CUT PG ON OFF

DASHED LINES

DATA

&

ANNOT

DATA ONLY

DATE M,D,Y

dB

d BV

DC OFFSET

Decade

Degree

DELETE FILE

DELETE FREQ

DELETE LINE

CRCR (display)

CSPC

0-1 00 kHz MHz, HZ,

KHz,

RPM, ORD

CRFRrrss

CVFT

CTPGO

=

off

CTPGl

=

on

DSH L

DAAN

DATA

mm,dd,yy DATEmm,dd,yy

dB (terminator only)

dBV (terminator only)

0-1

0

MV, V, VRMS,

MVRM, DBV

DCOFrrss (max is

1 OVpeak

DEC (terminator only)

DEG (terminator only)

alpha

AT POINTR

DLTF'aaaaaaaa'

DLTFATPT

DLFR

DLTL (auto sequence

or auto math; table

must be displayed

0 or

I

DELETE REGION

DELETE VALUE

DEMOD BOTH

DEMOD CHAN 1

DEMOD CHAN 2

DEMOD ON OFF

DEMOD POLAR

DEMOD SELECT

DLRG

DLTV

DMB

DM1

DM2

DMOD

POLR

DMSE

1-20 DLRGrr

DLTV

DNB

DM1

DM2

Oor

1

DMODO

=

off

DMOD1

=

on

POLR

DMSE

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

=

one of the suffixes from the SUFFIX column s

.

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT PANEL COMMANDS

NAME MNEM RANGE

SUFFiXES SYNTAX

DESTN ADDRES

DESTN UNIT

DFAULT GRIDS

DFAULT LIMITS

DlFF

DlSC

DEAD

DEUN

DFGR

DLlM

DlFF

DISC

Dl AD

DlCO

DlFN

DlST

DlUN

DIV

1-7

5

1-1

DEADr

DEUNrr

DFGR

DLlM

DlFF

DlSC

DISC ADDRES-

DISC COPY

DISC FCTN

DISC STATUS

DISC UNIT

DIV

1-7

DlADr

DlCO

DlFN

DlST

0-1

5

10*38

TRACE A (TRCA)

TRACE B (TRCB)

)

SAVED 1 (SAVI

SAVED 2 (SAV2)

DlUNrr

DlVrrr

DlVssss

DOWN

ARROW

DOWN

DOTS

DSPL

ESMP

EDIT

EDDN

EDLN

LINE

EDMA

EDNM

EDPL

EPOL

EDRS

EDTB

1-20

1-20

1-20

1-20

1-20

1-20

0 or 1

0 or 1

DOWN

DOTS

DSPLO

=

off

DSPLI

=

on

ESMPO

=

off

ESMPI

=

on

EDIT

-- -

DOTS

DSPLAY ON OFF

E SMPL ON OFF

EDIT

EDIT DENOM#

EDIT LINE#

EDIT LINE#

EDIT MATH

EDIT NUMER#

EDIT POLE#

EDIT POLES

EDIT RESDU#

EDIT TABLE

EDDNrr

EDLNrr

LlNErr

EDMA

EDNMrr

EDPLrr

EPOL

EDRSrr

EDTB

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

.

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix 5-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT PANEL COMMAMDS

NAME MNEM

RANGE

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

EDIT WEIGHT

EDIT ZERO#

EDIT ZEROS

END EDIT

EDWT

EDZR

EZER

ENED

1-20

EDWT

EDZRrr

EZER

ENED (auto

sequence or auto

math; table must be

displayed first)

ENGR

ENT (terminator only)

EU (terminator only)

alpha

alpha

EU Ll 'aaaaaa'

EU L2'aaaaaa1

VEU, MVEU, DB

VEU, MVEU,

DB

EUVI rrss

EUV2rrss

rrErr (exponential

notation; example:

1 OE4

=

100 000. D

or L can be used in

place of E.)

EXP

lot38

ENGR

UNITS

ENTER

E U

EU LBL CHAN 1

EU LBL CHAN 2

EU VAL CHAN 1

EU VAL CHAN 2

EXPONENT

ENGR

ENT

EiJ

EULl

EUL2

EUVl

EUV2

+

1nVto

+

1 OOOV

+lnVto

+

1

ooov

E

EXPON

EXPON CHAN 1

EXPON CHAN 2

EXT

F RESP LINRES

F RESP LOGRES

F RESP SWEPT

FAULT LOG

FFT

FFT-I

FILTRD INPUT

FIT FCTN

EXP

XPNl

XPN2

EXT

FRLN

FRLG

FRSW

FTLG

FFT

FFTI

FILT

FTFN

USEC, MSEC,

SEC, MIN, REVS

USEC, MSEC,

SEC, MIN, REVS

XPNI rrss

XPN2rrss

10*38

FRLN

FRLG

FRSW

FTLG (disc service

functions)

FFT

FFTI

FlLT

FTFN

r

=

value within the range specified in the RANGE column

.

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

B-Quick

Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

FIT

-,

SYNTH

FIX LINE#

FIXED INTGRT

FIXED SINE

MMEM

FTSN

FXLN

FXlN

FSlN

RANGE

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

FTSN

1-20 ENT FXLNrr

FXlN

64-1 00000 MHz, HZ, KHz

RPM, ORDS

FSlNrrss (range is

64

HZ

to I00 kHz; entry

limits depend on suf-

fix)

FLAT

FLTl

FLT2

FM

I

FM2

FLAT TOP

FLOAT CHAN 1

FLOAT CHAN 2

FM CHAN 1

FM CHAN

2

FNDMTL FREQ

FORCE CHAN 1

FORCE CHAN 2

FORCEIEXPON

FORMAT

FORMAT OPTION

FREE RUN

FLAT

FLTl

F LT2

FMI

FM2

FNFR

FRCI

FRC2

FOXP

FORM

FOOP

FREE

0-239

0-1 OOk

10+38

MHz, HZ, KHz

RPM, ORDS

USEC, MSEC,

SEC, MIN, REVS

USEC, MSEC,

SEC. MIN. REVS

FNFRrrrsss

FRCl rrrsss

FRC2rrrsss

FOXP

FORM

FOOPrr

FREE

10*38

FREQ RESP

FREQ RESP

FREQ SPAN

Linear Resolution

Log Resolution

Swept Sine

Time Capture

FRQR

FRSP

FRS

10.24 mHz

-

I00 kHz

FRQR (display)

FRSP (measurement)

MHz,

HZ,

KHz,

RPM. ORDS

DEC

MHz,

HZ,

KHz,

DEC, OCT

FRSrrrsss

FRSrDEC

FRSrrrsss

1-5

2 mHz-

100 kHz

same as linear resolution

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the-SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME MNEM RANGE SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

FRBK

FRONT BACK

FST AV ON OFF

FRBK

FSAV 0 or 1

FSAVO

=

off

FSAVI

=

on

GOTOrr

GRID AREA

GRID PEN

GRAR

GRDP

I

-max

GRAR

GRDPrr (max

=

number of pens in

plotter)

GNDI

GROUND CHANI

GROUND CHAN2

HANN

HELP

GNDI

GND2

HAN N

HELP

H IST

HIS1

HIS2

HMNC

HPWR

HXCT

HXLF

HXOF

HXRT

HAN N

HELP

HlST

HIS1

H IS2

HMNC

HPWR

HXCT

HXLF

HXOF

HXRT

HYCL--

HY LW

HYOF

HYUP

0-31 IBADrr

IBFN

HZ (terminator only)

HZS

HZlP (terminator only),

HIMS (terminator only)

.

-

HlST

HlST 1

HlST

2

HMNC ON

HMNC POWER

HOLD X CENTER

HOLD X LEFT

HOLD X OFF

HOLD X RIGHT

HOLDY_CENIELHYCI

HOLD Y LOWER

HOLD Y OFF

HOLD Y UPPER

HP-IB ADDR

HP-IB

FCTN

Hz

HYLW

HYOF

HYUP

IBAD

IBFN

HZ

HZS

HZIP

HlMS

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one

of

the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Hz

(Sec)

HzIPoint

HzImSec

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

MNEM

HZlM

HZlS

HZ10

IMAG

IMBK

IRSP

INCT

INDl

ICPL

ISPI

ISP2

ITM 1

ITM2

INST

IWND

INGR

INGl

INTM

RANGE SUFFlXES SYNTAX

HzlMin

HzISec

HzIOrder

IMAG

IMAGE BACKUP

IMPLS RESP

INIT CATLOG

INIT DISC

INPUT COUPLE

INPUT SPEC

1

INPUT SPEC 2

INPUTTIME

1

INPUT TIME

2

INST

INST WNDOWD

INTGRT

INTGRT INIT= 0

INTGRTTIME

HZlM (terminator

only)

HZlS (terminator only)

HZ10 (terminator only)

IMAG

IMBK

IRSP

alpha

alpha

I NCT'aaaaaa'

IN Dl 'aaaaaa'

ICPL

lSPl

1SP2

ITM 1

ITM2

INST

IWND

INGR

INGl

1 0-3-1

03*

USEC, MSEC, SEC INGRTrrss

JWI

kHz

KHL

KHlO

LSUN

LBLA

LBLM

LSMS

LlNX

not progammable over the HP-IB

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

alpha

alpha

KHz (terminator only)

KHlO (terminator

only)

LSU N

LBLAiaaa,aaa'

LBLM 'aaa,aaal

LSMS

LlNX

kHzIOrder

L SPEC UNITS

LABEL ASEQ

LABEL MATH

LAST M EAS

LIN X

LINE

.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT PANEL COMMANDS

NAME

LINE A TYPE#

MNEM

LlNA

RANGE

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

LINArrr,rrr (number

depends on plotter;

2nd. parameter

optional)

LINBrrr,rrr (number

depends on plotter;

2nd parameter

optional)

LNTP

LNRS

LSPC

LSPl

LSP2

LNSW

LN

I

LN

1-8; see comment

LINE

B

TYPE# LlNB 1-8; see comment

LINE TYPES

LINEAR RES

LINEAR SPEC

LINEAR SPEC 1

LINEAR SPEC 2

LINEAR SWEEP

LN OF DATA

LN-1 OF DATA

LOCAL

LOG RES

LOG SWEEP

LOG X

LOOP TO

LNTP

LNRS

LSPC

LSPl

LSP2

LNSW

LN

LN 1

LCL

LGRS

LGSW

LOGX

LPTO 1-20 (rl)

1-32,767 (r2)

LCL

LGRS

LGSW

LOGX

LPTOrl ,r2 (I st

number

is' end of

loop; 2nd is cycle

count)

MAG (LOG)

'

MAG (dB)

MAG (dBm)

MANUAL PRVIEW

MANUAL SWEEP

MGLG

MGDB

MDBM

MAPR

MNSW

MKVL

MATH

M AXS

M DSP

MGLG

MGDB

MDBM

MAPR

M NSW

MKVL

MATH

M AXS

MDSP

MARKER VALUE

MATH

MAX SPAN

MEAS

DlSP

r

=

value within the range specified in the RANGE column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

B-Quick

Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL COMMANDS

NAME

MEAS MODE

uSec

m EU

WINEM

RANGE SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

MSMD

USEC

MEU

USEC (terminator

only)

MEU (terminator only)

MHz (terminator only)

MHIO (terminator

only)

mSec MSEC

MSEC (terminator

only)

MV (terminator only)

mVlEU

mVrms

MVEU

MVRM

MVEU (terminator

only)

MVRM (terminator

only)

Min

MinlDec

MinlOct

MIN

MlDC

MIOC

MIN (terminator only)

MIDC (terminator

only)

MIOC (terminator

only)

10*38

M PY

M

PY

TRACE A (TRCA)

TRACE B (TRCB)

SAVED

1

(SAVI)

SAVED 2 (SAV2)

-

MPYrrr

M PYssss

MRKR

-+

PEAK

--

NEGATE

MKPK

NEG

NXT

MKPK

NEG

NXT (MATH menu,

first level)

NEX (MATH menu,

second level)

NEXT (COOWD

menu)

NX

(AVG

menu)

NXTP (disc catalog)

NXPG (disc service

logs)

--

NEXT N EX

NEXT

NEXT

NEXT PAGE

NEXT PAGE

NX

NXTP

NXPG

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

-

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

B-Quick

Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

NEXT RECORD

N ICHOL

NO

MNEM

NXRC

NlCL

RANGE

SUFFlXES SYNTAX

NXRC

NlCL

Use REJT in place of NO for previewing over the bus

NOPG

NAVG

N POL

NZER

NYQT

OClM

OClS

OCT

OHM

ORBT

ORD

ORDR

ORCL

OU LG

not programmable via HP-IB

OVRJO

=

off

OVRJl

=

on

10*3*

1-32767

1-40

1-40

NOPG

NAVGrrr

NPOLrr

NZERrr

NYQT

OClM (terminator

only)

OCIS (terminator only)

OCT (terminator only)

OHM (terminator only)

ORBT

ORD (terminator only)

ORDR

NO PAGING

NUMBER AVGS

NUMBER POLES

NUMBER ZEROS

NYQUST

OctIMin

OctISec

Octave

Ohm

ORBITS TI vsT2

Orders

Orders (Revs)

Orders CAL

OUTPUT LOG

OUTPUT STRING

H

HZIO, KHlO

M

ORCL rrr sss

OU LG

OVER WRITE

OVERWR AU MAN

OVR LP%

P SPEC LINRES

P SPEC UN'ITS

PACK DISC

PAGE BACK

PAGE FORWRD

PAGING CONTRL

OVWR

OVAU

OVLP

PSLN

PSUN

PKDl

PGBK

PGFW

PCTL

0

or

1

OVWR

OVAUO

=

off

OVAUl

=

on

OVLPrr

PSLN

PSU N

PKDl

PGBK

PGFW

PCTL

1-90

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

cohmn

s

=

one

of

the suffixes from the SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL COMMANDS

Front

Panel

Comman

NAME

PAUSE ASEQ

PAUSE CONT

MNEM

RANGE

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

PSAS

PSCN

PSCN toggles

PAUS-pauses

CONT-continues

PDFl

PDF

1

PDF 2

PEAK HOLD

PHASE

PLOT

PLOT ADDRES

PLOT AREA

PLOT LIMITS

PLOT PRESET

PM CHAN

1

PM CHAN

2

PMlFM CRRIER

Points

PointslDec

PointslOct

PointslSweep

POLARAMvsPM

POLE RESIDU

POLE ZERO

POLY-NOM IAL

POWER

POWER SPEC

POWER SPEC 1

POWER SPEC 2

PRESET

-

PDFl

PDF2

PHLD

PHSE

PLOT

PLAD

PLAR

PLlM

PLPR

PM 1

PM2

PFCR

PNTS

PIDC

PlOC

PISW

POLR

PRSD

PZRO

POLY

PWR

PSPC

PSPI

PSP2

PRST

PRVP

0-31

+_I80 DEG

PHLD

PHSErrrDEG

PLOT

PLADrr

PLAR

PLlM

PLPR

PMI

PM2

PFCR

PNTS (terminator

only)

PIDC (terminator only)

PlOC (terminator only)

PISW (terminator only)

PRSD

PZRO

POLY

PWR

PSPC

PSPI

PSP2

PRST

PRVP

-

PREV PAGE

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixesfrom the SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

B-Quick

Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

PRIODC CHIRP

PROTCT ON OFF

PRVIEW OFF

PRVIEW ON OFF

PulselRev

PwrSRQ ON OFF

RAMP TIME

MNEM

PCRP

PTON

PROF

PRON

PlRV

PSRQ

RANGE

1-99

0 or

1

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

PCRPrr

PTONO

=

off

PTONI

=

on

PROF

PRONO

=

off

PRONI

=

on

PlRV (terminator only)

0 or 1

10+38 USEC, MSEC,

SEC, MIN, REC

PSRQO

=

off

PSRQl

=

on

RAMPrrrsss (limit is

*3%; entry'range

10

depends on suffix)

RND

RAMP

RANDOM NOISE RND

RNG -51 to

+

27 dBV

RANGE

Y

MV, VRMS,

MVRM, DBVR,

RNGrrrsss

(entry is EU optional;

range depends on

suffix)

RDPI

READ PEN-+Pl

READ PEN+P2

REAL

REAL PART

RECALL DATA#

RECALL FILE

RDPI

RDP2

REAL

RLPT

RCLD

RCFL

1 or2

alpha

REAL

RLPT

RCLDr

RCFL'aaaaaaa'

REClP

Recoid

REF CHAN

1

REF CHAN 2

REF LEVEL

RESLTN

RClP

REC

RFCl

RFC2

RFLV

R ES

5 mV to

31.5 Vpk

REClP

REC (terminator only)

RFCI

RFC2

.

V,

MV, VRMS, MVRM,

DBVR, EU

RFLVrrrsss

RESrrrsss

64

pHz- HZIP, PISW

99.99994

kHz

1-1

10

ptsldec PIDC, PIOC, PISW

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

-

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

MNEM

RSAU

RSCT

RTN

REVS

ROT

RPM

RPMS

SMPF

SAVD

SAV F

RANGE

0 or

1

alpha

SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

RSAUO

=

fix

RSAUI

=

au

RESLTN AU FIX

RESTOR CATLOG

RETURN

REVS

ROT 90 ON OFF

RPM

RPM (Sec)

SAMPLE FREQ

SAVE DATA#

SAVE FILE

SAVE'STATE#

SAVE RECALL

SAVED 1

SAVED 2

SBAND INCRMT

SBAND ON

SBAND POWER

SCALE

SCALE FREQ

SCALE FREQ

SCROLL ON OFF

Sec

SeclDec

SecIOct

SELECT DATA

RTN

REVS (terminator

only)

0 or

1

ROT0

=

off

ROT1

=

on

RPM (terminator only)

RPMS

1-256 kHz

1 or2

alpha

1-5

KHz, HZ, MHz

RPM, PlRV

SMPFrrrsss

SAVDr

SAVF 'aaaaaaaa'

SAVSr

SAVR

SAVI

SAV2

12.8 pHz

-

100 kHz

KHz, Hz, MHz, RPM,

ORD

SBlNrrrsss

SBND

SPWR

SAVS

SAVR

SAV

1

SAV2

SBlN

SBND

SPWR

SCAL

SCFR

SCLF

SCRL

SEC

SIDC

SlOC

SDAT

SM ES

10k6

10+6

0 or

1

KHz, HZ, MHz

KHz, HZ, MHz

SCFRrrrsss (SYNTH)

SCLFrrrsss (CURVE

FIT)

SCRLO

=

off

SCRLI

=

on

SEC (terminator only)

SlDC (terminator only)

SIOC (terminator only)

SDAT

SMES

.

SELECT MEAS

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the SUFFlX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT PANEL COMMANDS

ommands

gcont)

NAME

SELECT PENS

SELECT TRIG

SELF TEST

SERVCE FCTNS

SET PI LWR LF

SET P2 UPR RT

SINGLE

SINGLE CAL

SLOPE

SLOPE

+

-

SOLID GRIDS

SOLID LINES

SOLIDA DASH B

SOURCE

MNEM

RANGE

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

SPEN

SELT

TST

SVFN

SEPl

SEP2

SNGL

SNGC

SLP

SLOP

SLGR

SLDL

SLDA

SRCE

SRLV

SRLM

SROF

SRON 0 or 1

0-5V

5 mV-5V

V, MV, VRMS,

MVRM, DBV

V,

MV, VRMS,

MVRM, DBV

SPEN

SELT

TST

SVFN

+

32767 SEPl rrr,rrr

SEP2rrr,rrr

SNGL

SNGC

SLP

+

32767

0 or 1 SLOP0

=

off

SLOP1

=

on

SLGR

SLDL

SLDA

SRCE

SRLVrrrsss

SRLMrrrsss

SROF

SRONO

=

off

SRONI

=

on

SOURCE LEVEL

SOURCE LIMIT

SOURCE OFF

SOURCE ON OFF

SOURCE TRIG

SPARE BLOCK SPBL

SPFN

SPMK

SPED

SQRT

STBL

STRT

depends on drive

see Chapter 11 of operating manual

SPBL

SPFN

SPMK

SPCL

FCTN

SPCL MARKER

SPEED F S

SQUARE ROOT

STABLE (MEAN)

START

0 or 1

SPED0

=

slow

SPED1

=

fast

SQRT

STBL

STRT

r

=

value within the range specified in the RANGE column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

.

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

ront

Panel Commaas

NAME

START ASEQ

1

START ASEQ 2

START ASEQ 3

START ASEQ

4

START ASEQ 5

START CAPTU R

START FREQ

MNEM

RANGE

SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

ASQl

ASQ2

ASQ3

ASQ4

ASQ5

STCP

ASQI

ASQ2

ASQ3

ASQ4

ASQ5

STC P

SF

KHz, HZ

99999.97952 MHz, RPM, ORD

Hz

0-

SFrrrsss

(linear res, capture)

SFrrrsss

(log res)

SFrrrsss

(swept sine)

STMA

0.1

HZ-

100

kHz

KHz, HZ

MHz

64 ~Hz- KHz, HZ

99999.99988 MHz, RPM,

Hz ORD

START MATH

START PLOT

START THRU PT

STATE TRACE

STPL

STH R

STTR

STPL

STHR

STTR

STAT

=

state

TRAC

=

trace

SPFT

120 pHz

-

I00

kHz

KHz, HZ,

MHz, RPM, ORD

SPFrrrsss

(swept sine)

STOP FIT

STOP FREQ

STORE WEIGH

SUB

SPFT

SPF

SUB

10*38

TRACE A (TRCA)

TRACE B (TRCB)

SAVED

I

(SAVI)

SAVED

2

(SAV2)

SU Brrr

SU Bsss

SWEEP DOWN

SWEEP HOLD

SWEEP RATE

SWDN

SWHD

SWRT

SWDN

holds the sweep

lO*3*

SIDC, MIDC, SIOC,

MIOC, HIMS, HZIS,

HZlM

SWRTrrrsss (limit

depends on suffix)

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

c

.

olumn

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME MNEM

RANGE

SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

SWEEP UP

SWEPT SINE

SWEPT UNITS

SYNTH

SWUP

SSlN

SWUN

SNTH

SN FT

SNFN

SYSC

GAIN

TT

TBFN

THD

THED

THLN 1-32767 USEC, MSEC, SEC,

MIN, REVS, REC

10+38

SWUP

SSlN

SWUN

SNTH

SN FT

SNFN

SYSC

GAlNrrr

TT

TBFN

TH D

THED

THLNrrrsss (limit is

32767 records; range

depends on suffix)

THRUO

=

off

THRUI

=

on

THSE

1-32767 USEC, MSEC, SEC,

MIN, REVS, REC

THSZrrrsss (limit

is

32767 records; range

depends on suffix)

THTl

SYNTH

-t

FIT

SYNTH FCTN

SYSTEM CNTLR

SYSTEM GAIN

TI1

-

T

TABLE FCTN

THD

THRUPT HEADER

THRUPT LENGTH

THRUPT ON OFF

THRUPT SELECT

THRUPT SIZE

THRU

THSE

THSZ

0 or 1

THRUPTTIME 1 THTl

TICK MARKS

TIM AV ON OFF

TIME BUFFER

TIME CAPTUR

TIME CAPTUR

TIME DELAY

TKMK

TI AV

TMBF

CPTR

TMCP

TMDL

10*38

TKMK

TlAVO

=

off

TlAVl

=

on

TMBF

CPTR

(MEAS

MODE)

TMCP

(PRESET)

USEC, MSEC, SEC TMDLrrrsss

(CURVE

FIT)

r

=

value within the range specified in the RANGE column

the

SUFFlX

column

s

=

one of the suffixesfrom

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix 6-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

TIME DELAY

TIME H,M,S

TIME LENGTH

WINEM

TDLY

TIME

TLN

RANGE

10+38

OO,OO,OO

-

23,59,59

8

ms

-

781 25s

SUFFIXES

USEC, MSEC, SEC

SYNTAX

TDLYrrrsss (SYNVH)

USEC, MSEC, SEC

MIN, REVS

TLNrrrsss

(limit is 781 25s; range

depends on suffix)

TMRl

TMR2

TMRC

TMTH

TIME REC 1

TIME REC 2

TIME RECORD

TIME THRUPT

TIMED PAUSE

TIMED PRVIEW

TIMED START

TMRl

TMR2

TMRC

TMTH

TIPS

TlPR

TlST

0-32767

0- 1 038

OO,OO,OO

24,59,59

SEC

SEC

TlPSrrrSEC

TlPRrrSEC

TlSTrr,rr,rr

(24 hour deactivates

timed start)

TOPR

TOPY

TOPZ

TRCA

TO+POL RESIDU

TO+ POLY

TO+ POL ZERO

TRACE A

TRACE A PEN

TOPR

TOPY

TOPZ

TRCA

TRAP 0-max

TRAPrr (max is

number of pens in

plotter)

TRCB

TRACE

B

TRACE

B

PEN

TRCB

T

plotter

TRACE TITLE

TRIG

DELAY

TRIG LEVEL

UNFIX LINE#

UNIFRM (NONE)

UNITS

UP

ARROW

UPPER LOWER

TlTL

TRGD

TRLV

UFLN

UNlF

UNIT

UP

UPLO

10*38

1-20

V, MV, EUCI, EUC2

alpha TITL'aaaaaa'

TRGD

TRLVrrrrssss (max is

1 OV for ext trigger)

UFLNrr

UNlF

UNlT

UP

U PLO

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

s

=

one of the suffixes from the SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL

COMMANDS

NAME

MNEM

USOR

ULlM

ULlN

UCRR

USDl

USRQ

SRQl

SRQ2

SRQ3

SRQ4

SRQ5

SRQ6

SRQ7

SRQ8

USWT

RANGE

SUFFIXES SYNTAX

USOR

'

USER ORDER

USER LIMITS

USER LINES

USER CRRIER

USER SAVDl

USER SRQ

USER SRQl

USER SRQ2

USER SRQ3

USER SRQ4

USER SRQ5

USER SRQ6

USER SRQ7

USER SRQ8

USER WEIGHT

ULlM

ULlN

current span MHz, HZ, KHz, RPM,

ORD

UCRRrrrsss

USDI

USRQ

SRQI

SRQ2

SRQ3

SRQ4

SRQ5

USWT

v

v

v

(terminator only)

VEU

(terminator only)

VHZ

V2IHZ (PSD)

VWHZ (ESD)

VIEW

VIEW CATLOG

VIEW INPUT

VIEW MATH

VIEW OFF

VIEW WEIGHT

V2HZ

V2SH

VIEW

CAT

VWlN

VWMA

VWOF

VWWT

V2HZ

V2SH

VlEW

CAT

VWlN

VWMA

VWOF

VWWT

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

FRONT

PANEL COMMANDS

NAME

Vrms

VOLTS

VOLTS CHAN 1

VOLTS CHAN 2

VOLTS PEAK

VOLTS RMS

WEIGHT REGION

WEIGHT VALUE

WINDOW

MMEM

VRMS

V LTS

VLTI

RANGE

SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

VRMS

(terminator only)

VLTS

VLTl

VLT2

VTP

K

VTRM

WTRG

WTVL

WNDO

see comment

0-100 kHz

10+38

.

KHz, HZ, MHz

VTPK

VTRM

WTRGrrrsss

WTVLrrr

WNDO

Xrrrsss (entry optional;

range and suffix

depend on current

display)

XASC

XFOF

see comment

XSCLrrrsss

XSCLrrr,rrrsss (range

and suffix depend on

current display)

X AUTO SCALE

X FCTN OFF

X FlXD SCALE

X ASC

XFOF

XSCL

X MRKR SCALE

,

XMKR

XOFF

XVAL see comment

XOFF

XVALrrrsss

XVALrrr, rrrsss

(range and suffix

display)

X

OFF

X VALUE

-depenhWrrent

Y

Y see comment

Yrrrsss (entry optional;

range and suffix

depend on current

display)

YASC

YDSC

see comment

YSCLrrrsss

YSCLrrr,rrrsss

(range and suffix

depend on current

display)

-

Y AUTO SCALE

Y DFLT SCALE

Y FlXD SCALE

YASC

Y DSC

YSCL

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the SUFFIX column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference

Guide

FRONT PANEL COMMANDS

NAME

MNEM

RANGE

SUFFIXES

SYNTAX

Y MRKR SCALE

Y

OFF

Y VALUE

YMKR

YOFF

YVAL see comment

YMKR

YOFF

YVALrrrsss

WALrrr,rrrsss

(range and suffix

depend on current

display)

YES

ZERO START

Use ACPT in place of YES when previewing over the bus.

ZST ZST

r

=

value within the range specified in the

RANGE

column

s

=

one of the suffixes from the

SUFFIX

column

a

=

alphanumeric character

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

6-Quick Reference

Guide

.

BUS-ONLY

COMMANDS

COMMAND

Add Block

MNEM

ADDB

SYNTAXIDATA FORMAT

ADDBnl ,n2[,n3]

Adds block nl to n2 and puts the result in n3. If n3

is not specified the result is put in n2.

ADDXnl ,n2,n3[,n4]

Adds complex constant nl

, n2 to block n3 (nl is

the real part and n2 is the imaginary part). The

result is put in n4 is specified, n3 if not.

ADDCnl ,n2[,n3]

Adds constant nl to real block n2 and puts the

result in n3. If n3 is not specified the result put in n2.

AS?

Returns contents of activity status register

ASM H n

Where n

=

decimal equivalent of sum of bits to be

unmasked. See table 7.

ASMLn

Where n

=

decimal equivalent of sum of bits to be

unmasked. See table 7.

BRlTn

Where values for n are:

0 =trace off

1

=dim

2 =half bright

3 =full bright (default)

BLSZ size,nl [,count]

Size is limited to 37 900 words

nl is first buffer (0 to 15)

Add Complex Constant to Block ADDX

Add Real Constant to Block ADDC

Activity Status Query

Activity Status Mask High

AS?

ASMH

Activity Status Mask Low ASM L

Brightness BRIT

Block Size BLSZ

Character Rotation CHRO CHROn

Where values of n are:

0

= O0

(default)

1 =90°

2= 180°

3

=

270°

CHSZn

Where values of n are:

0

=

24 x 36 points (default)

1 =36x54

2=48x72

3=60x90

CLBFn

Wheren

=

-4to15

Character Size CHSZ

Clear Buffer

CLEF

[ ]

indicates

optional

parameter

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY COWihlANDS

COMMAND

Command Echo Disable

Command Echo Enable

Complex Fast Fourier Transform

MNEM SPINTAXIDATA FORMAT

COM D

COME

CFFT

COMD

COME

CFFTnl ,n2

Performs FFT on complex block nl and puts

results in n2.

CFTI nl ,n2

Performs inverse FFT on complex block nl and

puts results in n2.

CNJBnl [,n2]

Computes the complex conjugate of complex

block nl and puts results in n2. If n2 is not specified

.

the results are put in nl

CTADn

Where n

=

0

to 31

CXAVnl ,n2,n3,awf

Computes cross spectrum of complex floating

point blocks nl and n2 and exponentially averages

it with complex floating point block n3. awf is the

average weighting factor (a power of two); Result is

put in block n3.

CPEKnl ,n2,n3

Computes cross spectrum of complex floating

point blocks nl and n2 and compares magnitudes

of result with complex block n3. The larger values

are put in n3.

CSPSnl ,n2,n3

Computes cross spectrum of complex floating

point blocks nl and n2 and adds it to complex

floating point block n3, puts results in n3.

Used as an exponent indicator in scientif~c notation,

DlFBnl [,n2]

Computes differential of block nl and puts result in

.

n2. If n2 is not specified result is put in nl

DSWQ

DSP'aaa

...

aaa'

(max 24 characters)

DBSZsize,n 1[ ,count]

Size is number of words in each buffer; nl is the

first buffer; count is the number buffers. If count is

not specified, one block is configured.

DSP?

Returns display message, up to

24

characters

Complex Inverse Fast

Fourier Transform

Conjugate Block

CFTI

CNJB

Controller Address

Cross Spectrum

Exponential Average

CTAD

CXAV

Cross Spectrum Peak Hold CPEK

Cross Spectrum Summation CSPS

D

(exponent image specifier) D

DlFB Differentiate Block

Disable Sweep SRQ

Display

Display Buffer Size

DSWQ

DSP

.

DBSZ

Display Query

[ ] indicates

optional

parameter

DSP?

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY

COMMANDS

Display Buffer Active Append

Display Buffer Active Clear

Display Buffer Switch

DBAA

DBAC

DBSW

DBAAn

Where n is the buffer to be activated

DBAC n

Where n is the buffer to be cleared and activated

DBSWnl ,n2

Where nl is the currently displayed buffer, and n2

is the buffer to be displayed

DBDNn

Where n is te buffer to be taken down

DBUPr:

Where n is the buffer to be put up

DSPD

DSPE

DlVBnl ,n2[,n3]

Divides block n2 by nl and puts results in n3. If n3

is not specified, result is put in n2.

DIVCnl ,n2[,n3]

Divides block n2 by constant nl and puts results in

n3. If n3 is not specified, results are put in

n2.-

DVJWw

,,

Aw

,nl [,n2]

Divides complex block nl by jo and puts results in

.

n2. If n2 is not specified, results are put into nl

o, ,,

is the floating point starting value of

o

and

Ao

'

is the incremental value of

w.

Display Buffer Down

Display Buffer Up

Display Disable

Display Enable

Divide Block

DBDN

DBUP

.DSPD

DSPE

DlVB

Divide Block into Real Constant DVlC

Divide Block by jo DVJW

Divide Imaginary Part DlVl DIVlnl ,n2[,n3]

Divides the imaginary part of complex floating point

block nl by real constant n2 and puts result in n3. If

n3 is not specified, result is put in nl

.

puts the results in n4. If n4 is not specified the

results are put in nl. nl may be a real or complex

block. Dividing a real block by a complex number

requires a destination block twice the size of the

real (source) block.

Divide By Constant DlVC DVICnl ,n2[,n3]

Divides block nl by constant n2 and puts results in

.

n3. If n3 is not specified, results are put in nl

DIVRnl ,n2[,n3]

Divides real part of complex floating point block nl

by real constant n2 and puts result in n3. If n3 is not

specified, result is put in nl.

Divide Real Part DlVR

[ ]

indicates

optional

parameter

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY

COMMANDS

COMMAND MMEM SYMPAXIBATA FORMAT

Dump Block in ANSI Binary

Dump Block in ASCII

Dump Block in Internal Binary

DBAN

DBAS

DBBN

DBAN

Dumps primitive block PBLKn in ANSl format.

DBAS

Dumps primitive block PBLKn in ASCII format

DBBN

Dumps primitive block PBLKn in internal binary

format.

DCAN

Dumps coordinate transform block in ANSI format.

DCAS

Dumps coordinate transform block in ASCll format.

DCBN

Dumps coordinate transform block in internal bin-

ary format.

DDAN

Dumps active trace in ANSl format.

DDAS

Dumps active trace in ASCll format.

DDBN

Dumps active trace in internal binary format.

DSAN

Dumps state in ANSl format.

DSAS

Dumps state in ASCII format.

DSBN

Dumps state in internal binary format.

DTAN

-

Dump Coordinate Transform

Block in ANSI Binary

Dump Coordinate Transform

Block in ASCll

Dump Coordinate Transform

Block in lnternal Binary

Dump Data in ANSl Binary

Dump Data in ASCII

Dump Data in lnternal Binary

Dump State in ANSl Binary

Dump State in ASCII

Dump State in Internal Binary

Dump Table in ANSI Binary

DCAN

DCAS

DCBN

DDAN

DDAS

DDBN

DSAN

DSAS

DSBN

DTAN

u

IAS

,mrv

Dump Table in Internal Binary

Dump Vector Display Buffer in

ANSI Binary

Dump Vector Display Buffer in

ASCII

Dump Vector Display Buffer in

Internal Binary

DTBN

DVAN

Dumps synthlcurve fit table in ASCII.

DTBN

Dumps synthlcurve fit table in internal binary.

DVAN

Dumps vector display buffer VBLKn in ANSI

format.

DVAS

Dumps vector display buffer VBLKn in ASCII

format.

DVBN

Dumps vector display buffer VBLKn in internal bin-

ary format.

DVAS

DVBN

[ ] indicates

optional

parameter

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

8-Quick

Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY COMMANDS

COMMAND

MNEM

ESWQ

ERR?

ERRD

ERRE

XAVG

SYNTAXlDATA

FORMAT

Enable Sweep SRQ

Error Code Query

Error SRQ Disable

Error SRQ Enable

Exponential Average

ESWQ

ERR?

Returns error code; refer to table

8

for description.

ERRD

ERRE

XAVGnl ,n2,awf

Exponentially averages nl with n2 and puts the

results in n2. awf is the average weighting factor (a

power of two).

FLTBnl ,n2

[,

count]

Converts integers'in block nl to floating point (real)

and puts results in n2. Count is optional point

count.

GRBLn,x,Ax

Where n is active buffer x is starting location Ax is

increment.

GRIMn,x,Ax

Where n is active buffer x is starting location Ax is

increment.

GRREn,x,Ax

Where n is active buffer x is starting location Ax is

increment.

HSTnl ,n2,vmax

nl contains the new input data, n2 is the histogram

count block, and vmax in the maximum absolute

amplitude range for nl

.

LOGO0

=

logo off for plots

LOGO1

=

logo on for plots

Float Block FLTB

Graph Real Block

GRBL

Graph Imaginary Part of

Complex Block

GRIM

Graph Real Part of Complex Block GRRE

Histogram HST

HP Logo LOGO

Identify

Instrument Status

Instrument Status Mask

ID?

IS?

ISM

ID?

outputs -/-character string "HP3562An

IS?

Returns instrument status register contents.

lSMn

where n is decimal equivalent of sum of bits to be

unmasked.

INGBnl [,n2]

Integrates nl and puts result in n2. If n2 is not

specified, result is put in nl.

KEYnn

Where nn is key code from

0

to 70.

Integrate Block INGB

Key Press Simulation

[

]

indicates

optional

parameter

KEY

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix 6-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY

COMMANDS

COMMAND

Key Press Query

Key Press SRQ Disable

Key Press SRQ Enable

L (long exponent imag specifier)

Label User SRQs One through

Eight

MNEM

KEY?

KEYD

KEYE

L

LBSI

LBS2

LBS3

SYNTAXIDATA FORMAT

KEY?

Returns key code of last key pressed.

KEYD

KEY

E

Used in scientific notation as an exponent indicator,

as is "E" and "D".

LBSn'aaaaaa[,bbbbbbI1

Where n is softkey number, aaaaaa is top line,

bbbbbb is bottom line LBS8

Line Type

LT LTn

Where values for n are:

0

=

solid lines (default)

1 =solid lines with endpoints

2

=

long dashes

3

=short dashes.

LBAN

Loads primitive block PBLKn in ANSl format.

LBAS

Loads primitive block PBLKn in ASCII format.

LBBN

Loads primitive block PBLKn in internal binary

format.

LDAN

Loads active trace in ANSl format

LDAS

Loads active trace ~n ASCll format.

lN

p

Loads active trace in internal binary format.

LSAN

Loads state in ANSl format.

LSAS

Loads state in ASCll format.

LSBN

Loads state in internal binary format.

LTAN

Loads synthlcurve fit table in ANSl format.

LTAS

Loads synthlcurve fit table in ASCll format.

--

Load Block in ANSI Binary

Load Block in ASCII

Load Block in Internal Binary

LBAN

LBAS

LBBN

Load Data in ANSI Binary

Load Data in ASCII

LDAN

LDAS

L

-

oa3lXEEI~~t

Load State in ANSI Binary

Load State in ASCII

Load State in Internal Binary

Load Table in ANSI Binary

Load Table in ASCII

LSAN

LSAS

LSBN

LTAN

LTAS

[

]

indicates

optional

parameter

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY

COMMANDS

COMMAND MNEM SYNTAXIDATA

FORMAT

Load Table in Internal Binary

LTBN

LTBN

Loads synthlcurve fit table in Internal binary format.

LUAN

Loads active user display buffer in ANSl format.

LUAS

Loads active user display buffer in ASCll format.

LUBN

Loads active user display buffer in internal binary

format.

MOVBnl ,n2[,count]

Moves nl to n2. Optional count is used to move

partial blocks.

MOVXnl ,n2,n3

[, count]

Moves complex number nl ,n2 (realjmag) into

complex block n3.

MOVCnl ,n2[,count]

Moves real constant nl into n2. Optional count

moves partial blocks.

MPYBnl ,n2[,n3]

Multiplies nl by n2 and puts results in n3. If n3 is

not specified, results are put in n2.

MPYXnl ,n2,n3[,n4]

Multiplies complex block n3 by complex constant

,n2 (realhag). Result is put in n4 if specified, n3 nl

otherwise.

MPYCnl ,n2[,n3]

Multipl~es n2 by constant nl and puts result in n3 is

specifled, n2 otherwise.

MPJWo,,,A o,nl [,n2]

Multiplies nl by jw and puts result in n2 if specif~ed,

nl if not.

,,a,

is the floating point starting value

and Aa is the incremental value of

o.

MPMGnl ,n2[,n3]

multiplies real floating point block nl by the magni-

tude squared of the complex floating point block n2

and puts the result in n3 if specified, nl if not.

MPSC nl [,n2];

Multiplies nl by complex conjugate of nl and puts

the result in n2 if specified, nl if not.

NEGB nl [,n2];

Negates nl and puts result in n2 if specified, nl if

not.

PCLRnl ,n

Clears the first n points in nl

.

Load User Display in ANSl Binary LUAN

Load User Display in ASCII

Load User Display in Internal

Binary

Move Block

LUAS

LUBN

MOVB

Move Complex M OVX

Move Constant M OVC

Multiply Blocks MPYB

Multiply Block by Complex

Constant

MPYX

Multiply Block by Real Constant MPYC

Multiply Block by jo MPJW

--

Multiply Block by Magnitude

Squared

MPMG

Multiply Block by Self Conjugate MPSC

Negate Block NEGB

Partial Block Clear PCLR

[ ] indicates

.optional

parameter

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY COMMANDS

COMMAND

Pause

Peak Hold

MNEM

SYMTAWDATA FORMAT

PKHD PKHDnl ,n2

Compares values in blocks nl and n2 and puts

larger values in n2.

PD

PU

~Ax,Y

Where

x

is X-axis location; y is Y-axis location.

PCBLnl

Converts complex floating point block nl to display

format and puts it in the active display buffer.

PRBLnl

,

n2

Converts real floating point block nl vs. n2 to dis-

play format and puts it in the active buffer.

PRKY

Where

x

is relative X-axis location, y is relative Y-axis

'location.

PTCTnl,n2

Where nl is block number, n2 is number of points.

Pen Down

Pen Up

Plot Absolute

Plot Complex Block

PD

PU

PA

PCBL

Plot Real Block PRBL

Plot Relative PR

Point Count

Power Spectrum Exponential

Average

PTCT

PXAV

.

PXAVnl,n2,awf

Computes power spectrum of the complex floating

point block nl and exponentially averages it with

real floating point block n2. awf is the average

weighting factor (a power of two).

PPEKnl ,n2

Computes power spectrum of nl and compares

the magnitudes of the result with real block n2, put-

ting the larger values in n2.

Power Spectrum Peak Hold PPEK

Power Spectrum Summation

-,-

PSPS PSPS nl

,

n2;

dmptltwpo~~~I&Img

point block nl and adds it to the real floating point

block n2. The result is put into n2.

--

-.

Primitive Block Number

Read Marker

PBLK

RDMK

PBLKnl

Where nl is the primitive block number,

0

to 31.

RDMK

Outputs 2 ASCII values, X-axis value then Y-axis

value.

RSMO

See Chapter

6

RSMG

See Chapter

6

Read Special Marker Once

Read Special Marker Group

RSMO

RSMG

[

] indicates

optional

parameter

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY COMMANDS

COMMAND

Ready Query

Ready Bit Disable

~ead; Bit Enable

Real Fast Fourier Transform

Real Inverse Fast Fourier

Transform

Reject

Remote Entry Disable

Remote Entry Enable

Remote Entry Speed

MNEM

R DY?

RDYD

RDYE

RFFT

RFTI

SYMTAXIDATB FORMAT

R DY?

Always returns "1"

RDYD

RDYE

RFFTnl,n2

Performs real FFT on nl and puts result in n2.

RFTl nl ,n2

Performs real inverse FFT on nl and puts result in

n2.

REJT

REND

RENE

RENSn, max

for constant accelaration,

>

1 for vari- where

n

is

0

able accelaration. Max is maximum entry velocity.

RENVn

where n is value

RMKD

RMKE

RMKVn

where n is value

RST

REV?

Outputs software revision date code and the revi-

of the appl~cable codes and format doc-

o which the software was designed.

SACR

Returns

4

values: Auto carrier

I

Auto cqrrier 2

Phase offset 1

Phase offset 2

SMSD

Returns a "1" if measurement is done,

"0"

if not

SMSP

Returns a

"1"

if sample was missed;

"0"

if not

SOVl

if not

Returns 1 if over range,

0

SOV2

if not

Returns 1 if over range,

0

REJT

-

REND

RENE

RENS

Remote Entry Value

Remote Marker Disable

Remote Marker Enable

Remote Marker Value

Reset

Revision

RENV

RMKD

RMKE

RMKV

RST

REV?

--

Send Auto Carrier

SACR

Send Measurement Done

Send Missed Sample

SMSD

SMSP

Send Overflow Status Channel 1 SOVl

Send Overflow Status Channel 2 SOV2

[ ] indicates

.

optional

parameter

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

BUS-ONLY

COMMANDS

COMMAND

Send Reference Locked

MNEM

RLOK

SYNTAXIBATA

FORMAT

RLOK

Returns a "1

"

if locked; "0" if trying to lock

externally.

SFLT

Returns 1 if source fault.

SSWP

Returns five values:

Input power

Output power

Cross spectrum real

Cross spectrum imaginary

Frequency

First 4 are real; frequency is long real

SER?

Outputs a 10-character string: serial number prefix

(4

integers), country of origin (1 letter) and

5

zeros.

SET

Loads instrument state; interchangeable with

LSAN.

SET?

Dumps instrument state; interchangeable with

DSAN.

SRQD

SRQE

STAT

STA?

See Chapter

6

SUBBnl ,n2[,n3]

Subtracts n2 from nl and puts result in n3 ~f spec-

ified, n2 otherwise.

SUBXnl ,n2,n3[, n4]

suwracts complex constant nl ,n2 (realjmag)

from

n3 and stores it in n4 if specified, n3 otherwise.

SUBCnl ,n2[,n3]

Subtracts nl from n2 and stores result in n3 if spec-

ified, n2 otherwise.

TMOE

TMOD

UFLBnl ,n2[,count]

Converts floating point block nl to integers and

puts result in n2. Optional count partially unfloats nl.

Poiqts to vector display buffer to be dumped with

DVAN, DVAS, DVBN.

WRIT'aaaaaa' where aaaaaa are alphanumeric

characters.

XAVG nl

,

n2, awl

See Chapter

6.

Send Source Fault

Send Sweep Point

SFLT

SSW

P

Serial Number Query SER?

Setup State

SET

Setup State Query

SET?

SRQ Disable

SRQ Enable

State

StatuslEvent Query

Subtract Block

SRQE

SRQD

STAT

STA?

SUBB

Subtract Complex Constant SUBX

Subtract Real Constant SU BC

Time-out enable

Time-out disable

Unfloat Block

TMOE

TMOD

UFLB

Vector Display Buffer

Write Text

Exponential averaging

B-36

VBLK

WRIT

XAVG

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference

STATUSBYTE

Guide

Table

2

shows the eight bits in the HP 3562A's status byte. The statusbyte is read by serial

polling the analyzer (which also clears the status byte). Five of these bits are encoded; refer to

table 3 for the condition codes. Chapter

6

provides complete explanations of the status byte

conditions.

Table

2

The

HP

3562A's

Status

Byte

Bit

Value

Description

see table 3

RQS

(HP 3562A requested service)

ERR

(HP-IB error)

RDY

(ready to accept HP-IB commands)

see table

3

see table

3

see table 3

see table 3

Bit

6

(RQS) is set when the HP 3562A sends an SRQ. Bit

5

(ERR) is set when an HP-IB error

commands. has been made. Bit

4

(RDY) is set when the analyzer is ready to receive HP-IB

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

STATUS BYTE

Table

3

shows the condition codes represented

by

bits 7,

3,

2,1

and

0

in the status byte.

Table

3

Status Byte

Condition Codes

Status

bit

Numbers

73210

Status

Byte

Value

0

1

2

3

4

001 01

00110

001 11

01 000

01001

01010

01 01 1

01 100

01 101

01110

01111

10000

10001

1001 0

1001 1

101 00

10101

10110

10111

11 000

11 001

11010

5

6

7

8

9

10

1 1

12

13

14

1.5

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

Description

No service requested

UserSRQ#I

UserSRQ#2

UserSRQ#3

UserSRQ#4

UserSRQ#5

UserSRQ#6

UserSRQ#7

UserSRQ#8

End of disc action

End of plot action

Instrument status change

Powerup

Key pressed

Device Clear Plotter, Listen HP 3562A

Unaddress Bus, Listen HP 3562A

Talk plotter, Listen HP '3562A

Talk disc execution. Listen HP 3562A

Talk disc report, Listen HP 3562A

Talk Amigo disc command, Listen HP 3562A

Talk Amigo disc data, Listen HP 3562A

Talk Amigo short status, Listen HP 3562A

Talk disc identify, Listen HP 3562A

Talk Amigo parallel poll, Listen HP 3562A

Listen Plotter, Talk HP 3562A

l&Qzid=

11100

11 101

11110

11111

137 Listen disc command, Talk HP 3562A

138 Listen disc execution, Talk HP 3562A

B9diste~-Acnigo;dis@wmma1?~lldS

P-3-SW?,

140 Listen Amigo disc data, Talk HP 3562A

141 Listen Amigo disc read, Talk HP 3562A

142

143

Listen Amigo disc write, Talk HP 3562A

Listen Arnigo disc format, Talk HP 3562A

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

STATUS

BYTE

Conditions

in

the

Status

When a condition is "masked," it is prevented from generating an SRQ when it becomes true.

Table

4

shows how to mask the status byte conditions that can be masked. Conditions that

cannot be masked are noted as well.

Table

4

Masking Status Byte Conditions

Condition

How

to

Mask

not maskable (never generates an SRQ)

not maskable

unmasked with SRQE; masked with SRQD

unmasked with ISMn, where n is decimal equivalent of the bits in

the IS register to be unmasked. This bit is completely masked by

sending ISMO.

masked with PSRQO; unmasked with PSRQl

masked with KEYD; unmasked with KEYE

not maskable.

SRQs are generated only by the status byte; the instrument status (IS) and activity status (AS)

registers must generate SRQs indirectly through the status byte. The IS register can generate

an SRQ if condition

11

in the status byte is enabled. The

AS

register is twice removed: bit

13

of

11

of the status byte must be enabled for the

AS

to generate an the IS register and condition

SRQ. Chapter

6

has all the details.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

THE

INSTRUMENT STATUS REGISTER

Table

5

shows the instrument status (IS) register. The contents of the IS are read by sending the

IS? command (which also clears the register). Unlike the status byte, the IS is not encoded:

each bit represents a single condition. Complete information on the IS register is provided in

Chapter 6. Remember that bit

11

in the status byte must be enabled (unmasked) before the IS

can indirectly generate an SRQ.

Table

5

Instrument Status Register

Bit

Condition

Measurement pause

Autosequence pause

End of measurement

End of autosequence

Sweep point ready

Channel

1

over range

Channel

2

over range

Channel

1

half range

Channel

2

half range

Source fault

Reference unlocked

Remote marker knob turn

Remote entry knob turn

Activity status register change

Power-on test failed

Bits in the IS are masked with the lSMn command, where n is the decimal equivalent of the

sum of the values of the bits to be unmasked. For example, ISM20 enables (unmasks) bit 2

(value

=

4)

and bit

4

(value =16). All other bits are masked.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix

8-Quick

Reference Guide

THE INSTRUMENT ER

The status query command

(STA?)

provides some information from both the status byte and

the instrument status register. Sending

STA?

causes the

HP

3562A to return the 16-bit word

shown in table

6.

Table

6

The STA?

Word

Bit

Value

Not used

Not used

Key pressed

Not used

R

DY

ERR

RQS

Message on screen

Measurement pause

Auto sequence pause

End of measurement

End of auto sequence

Sweep point ready

Channel

1

over range

Channel

2

over range

Not used

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

THE

ACTIVITY STATUS

REGiSTER

Table

7

shows the activity status (AS) register. The contents of the AS are read by sending the

AS? command (which does not clear the register). Unlike the status byte and like the IS, the AS

is not encoded: each bit represents a single condition. Complete information on the AS register

is provided in Chapter

6.

Remember that both bit

13

of the IS and condition

11

of the status byte

must be enabled before the AS can indirectly generate an SRQ.

Table

7

Activity Status

Register

Bit

0

Value

Condition

I

1

2

4

8

2

3

4

16

Check fault log

Filling time record

Filters settling

Curve fit in progress

Missed sample

Time preview

Accept data

Waiting for trigger

Waiting for arm

Not

used

Ramping Source

Diagnostic in Progress

Marker Calc

in

Progress

Bits in the AS are masked with the ASMLn and ASMHn commands, where n is the decimal

equivalent of the sum of the values of the bits to be unmasked. ASML unmasks for the nega-

tive-going transition; ASMH unmasks for the positive-going transition.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix B-Quick Reference Guide

ERROR

CODES

The Error query

(ERR?)

causes the analyzer to return the error code of the last

HP-IB

error.

Each error code has a corresponding description in table

8.

Note that these are the same

errors as those encountered

in

front panel operation. For complete descriptions, with sug-

gested corrective actions, refer to Appendix

B

of the

UP

3562A

Operating

Manual.

Table

8

Error Codes

Code

Error

No Peak Avg in HlST Meas

No Peak Avg in CORR Meas

Freq Resp, No

1

Ch Demod

Cross Corr, No 1 Ch Demod

No Fundamental

Code Error

View lnput Disabled

Cannot Use Zoom Data

Already Running

May Be Inaccurate

Cannot Be Comdex

Bad Delete Freq Table

Loops Nested Too Deep

Demod In Zoom Only

Numeric Overflow

Invalid: NyquisffNichols

Invalid: Log Data

No Carrier

No Peak Hold in Time Avg

Calibration in Progress

No Avg For Demod Hist

Not Active Softkey

Unknown Mnemonic

Line Too Long

Command Too Long

Alpha Delimiter Expected

Not A Valid Terminator

Extra Chars In Command

Function Inactive

Missing lnput

301

302

303

304

305

306

307

308

309

Not Valid Units

Not A Valid Number

Alpha Too Long

Number Too Long

Out Of Range

Unable To Curve Fit

Bad

# Of Parameters

Auto Carrier Selected

ENTRY Not Enabled

Code Error

400

401

402

403

500

600

601

602

603

604

605

606

607

608

609

610

611

612

613

614

615

616

617

618

~-

620

X

Marker Must Be Active

Buffer Overflow

No Coord Change Allowed

Not In Frequency Domain

No Data

Measurement In Progress

Trace Not Compatible

Data Type Incompatible

Data Blocks Incompatible

Source Block Empty

User Display Not Enabled

No Active Display Buffer

Recursive Call

Not A Valid Auto Math

Bad Setup State

Bad Auto Sequence Table

Bad Synth Table

State Bad Non-Volat~le

Bad Data Block

1+&&ZJ&a,-#=+r-

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

Marker Not On

No Valid Marker Units

No Capture Data

No Thruput Data

Thruput DataToo Long

Bad Curve Fit Table

Bad Capture

Bad Thruput

Not A Valid User Window

Bad Primitive Block

Not A Valid Block Length

Not A Valid Block Mode

Not HP-IB Controller

HP-IB Time Out

Bad Plotter Data Read

Cannot Recall Throughput

Not

A

Valid Catalog

Unformatted Disc

Catalog Full

Not A Valid Name

Not A Valid Display

File Not Found

Disc Full

Disc Reject

Recall Active Auto Seq

Unknown Disc Command Set

No Disc In Drive

Disc Write Protected

Disc Fault

Disc Transfer Error

No Spares Or Fault Areas

No Thruput File

Catalog Not In Memory

File Size Not Specified

&aleet=&p&+&&+m[~~

Source

=

Destination

621

622

623

624

Sector Size

< >

256 Bytes

Not Valid Format Option

Not Valid For This Disc

Destination Too Small

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix 6-Quick Reference Guide

KEY

CODES

Table

8

lists the

HP

3562A's key codes. Note that the eight softkey buttons have unique codes,

but individual softkey labels do not. The code of the last key pressed (since power-up or reset)

is returned by the KEY? command. Key presses are simulated by sending the analyzer the

KEYn command, where n is the code of the key to be simulated.

Table

8

Key

Codes

Key Name

No Key Pressed

ENGR UNITS

INPUT COUPLE

TRIG DELAY

HP-IB FCTN

DISC

SELECT TRIG

CAL

RANGE

AVG

SELECT MEAS

WINDOW

LOCAL

PLOT

SOURCE

FREQ

MEAS MODE

START

SPCL FCTN

PRESET

MATH

Code

Key Name

Code

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

Softkey

4

Softkey

5

Softkey

2

Softkey

I

(top)

Softkey

3

36

37

38

39

40

4

1

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

5 1

52

53

54

55

5

6

4

Softkey

7

Softkey

6

1

3

2

MARKER VALUE

-

(negative sign)

BACKSPACE

Softkey

8

(bottom)

VIEW INPUT

0

,

(comma)

SAVE RECALL

Y (marker

>

SPCL MARKER

HELP

AUTO MATH

CURVE FIT

X OFF

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

3

1

32

33

34

35

A&B

COORD

MEAS DlSP

ARM

SINGLE

UPPER LOWER

STATE TRACE

UNITS

FRONT BACK

SCALE

UP arrow

DOWN arrow

6 1

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

X

Y OFF

8

9

7

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

This appendix contains example HP BASIC 3.0 programs written for for the HP 3562A. These

programs were written to provide you with with ideas for controlling the HP 3562A via HP-IB.

They are not intended to be final solutions to any particular programming problems, but rather

to demonstrate the analyzer's power and flexibility.

NOTE

These programs are not warranted, guaranteed, or sup-

ported by Hewlett-Packard or any of its representatives in any

manner whatsoever.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

1

!

APPENDIX

C

EXAMPLE PROGRAM

1

.............................................................

-

!

!

DEMO PROGRAM PASS CONTROL

!

!

(c)

COPYRIGHT 1985, Hewlett-Packard Co.

!

!

!

!

!

!

last update 4-23-85

BASIC

3.0

PURPOSE:

This program responds to a request for sevice by

the HP3562A so that it can make direct digital

plots, etc., while attached to

a

Series 200

controller by passing control to the analyzer.

!

!

!

DATA DICTIONARY:

!

!

!

Spoll-byte Masked serial poll byte

!

!

@I0 HP-'IB code assignment of the

$562

!

!

Hpib-intr HPIB interupt service routine

!

!

..............................................................

!

-

Lm-M1J-T-hlT-R_7-~~~~--b+=wt

-

6.

ASSIGN @I0 TO 720

LOCAL @Io

--

-..

320 ENABLE INTR

7;2

330

!

340 W-1oop:GOTO W-loop

!

Wait for interupt

350

!

360

Hpib-intr:

!

Pass control interrupt service routine

370

Spoll-byte=B1NAND(SP0LL(@I0~~143)!

MASK OUT BITS

4,5,6

380

IF Spoll_byte>=14 AND Spoll_byte<=l43 THEN

390 SEND 7;UNL UNT TALK

20

CMD

9

400 GOT0 End-intr

410

END IF

420 End-intr:ENABLE INTR

7

430

RETURN

440 END

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

2

!

APPENDIX

C

-

EXAMPLE

PROGRAM

2

...........................................................

!

!

DEMO PROGRAM DUMP DATA TRACE

!

!

(c)

COPYRIGHT

1985,

Hewlett-Packard Co.

1

last updated 4-23-85

!

BASIC

3.0

!

!

!

PURPOSE:

!

!

This program will read data directly from a

!

HP3562A analyzer over the HP-IE bus

!

using the capability of the series 200.

1

!

!

!

!

DATA DICTIUNARY:

!

!

Max-val(*) The data array wax and/or win value used

!

Min-val(+) in determining the plotting

limit.

!

!

Header-len Data header length (constant)

The data is assumed to be linear

resolution data and is plotted;

if

complex,

in real and imag formats.

!

!

!

!

Data-len

N-points

Start-f

Delta-f

Hbuft*)

Data buffer length (bytes)

Number of data points

Start frequency

Frequency or time spacing

Real buffer containing data header

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

Fbuf(*) Real buffer containing data 'trace

!

...........................................................

!

INTEGER 1,Real ,Imag,Mag,Phase

,Plln_val(

1

:2)

DIM A$C21 ,Max-val(

1

:2)

Real=l

Imag=2

GINIT

!

Header_len=66

ASSIGN @Io TO 720

REMOTE @Io

!

!

GET

DATA

I

.

.

!

Data header length

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

2

DISP "DUMP DATA"

OUTPUT @Io;"DDANM

!

Dump data ANSI format

ENTER @Io USING "#,ZA,W";A$,Data-len

ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT OFF

!

Turn ASCII formatter off

RLLOCATE REAL Hbuf(1:Header-len)

ENTER @Io;Hhuf(

*

)

!

Read data header

!

!

EXTRACT HEADER INFORMATION

!

N_points=Hbuf(2) !Number of data points

Cmplx-f lg=Hbuf (37 !Complex data flag

Start-f=Hbuf

(

66

)

!Data start frequency

Delta-f=Hbuf (56

)

!Uelta frequency or time

IF

Cmplx-flg=l THEN

1

:N-points ,l:2

)

ALLOCATE Fbuf(

ELSE

ALLOCATE Fbuf

(

1

:N-points

,l

:

1

)

END IF

l

*

)

!Read data trace ENTER @Io; Fhuf

ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT ON

DISP "DATH TRANSFER COMPLETE"

!

!FIND MAX VALUE

j

DISP "FINDING

MAX

MIN FOR PLOT"

790 Max-min: !Calculates the MAX and

MIN

for plotting

es

800 !Initialize Uariabl

810 Max-val(Rea1 !=0

!

Real trace Max

820 Max-val( Imag

)=0

!

Imag trace Max

830 Min-val (Real )=0

!

Real trace Min

840 Min-val( Imaq

)=@!

!

Imag trace Min

!

Find Max's and Min's

850 FOR 1=1 TO N-points

860

FOR J=l TO Cmplx-f lgtl

870

IF

Fbuf(1,J);Max-val(J) THEN Max-val(J)=Fbuf(I,J)

880

IF Fbuf

(

I

,J

)

,J

)

iF30YEiii

J

--

900 NEXT

I

910 Plot-out:

!

Plots data

GCLEAR

GRAPHICS ON

X-min=Start-f

X-max=(N-points-1 )*Delta-f+Start-f

ALPHH OFF

FOR K-funct='t TO Cmplx-flgtl

IF Cmplxlflg=0 THEN

l0,15,85

VIEWPORT

10,1

ELSE

VIEWPORT 10,110,15,48

END IF

IF K-func t=2 THEN VIEWPORT 10,110,53,85

)

,Max-val(K_func

)!

WINDOW X-min,X-max ,Min-val(K_funct

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

2

1058

MOVEStart-f,Fbuf(l,K-funct!

1060

FOR

1=2TON_points

1070

PLOT

Start-ft(

I*Del

ta-f

,Fbuf

I

,KKfunct

f

1080

NEXT

I

1090

NEXT

M-funct

1100

!

1110 Border:

!

Plots border around data

1120

VIEWPORT

10,110,10,90

1130

WINDOW

0,1000,0,1000

11

48

MOVE

0,500

1150

DRAW

0,1800

1

160

PLOT

1

08@, 1000

1

170

PLOT

1

800,500

1 180

PLOT

0,508

1196

PLOT

0,0

l2OB

PLOT

1008 ,0

1210

PLOT

1600 ,SUB

1220

!

1230

DISP

""

1240

LOCAL

@Io

1250

END

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

3

!

APPENDIX

C -

EXAMPLE PROGRAM

3

...........................................................

DEMO PROGRAM 1/3 RD OCTAVE

(c) COPYWRIGHT 1985, Hewlett-Packard Co.

last update 4-23-85

BASIC

3.0

PURPOSE:

This program will read data directly from a

HP3562A analyzer over the HP-IB of the

HP9000

Series

200

controller.

The data is assumed to be in Log res

mod

and

amplitude units of vlt"2

it

is

converted to

a

psuedo 1/3 octave format and dumped back

to 3562A analyzer.

SUB REQUIRED:

F-s hape Computes the ANSI class 111 filter shape

DATA DICTIONARY:

Header-len

Data-len

N-points

Data header length (constant)

Data buffer length (bytes)

Number of data points

!

Delta-f Frequency spacing in dec/pt

!

!

Pt-dec Points per decade

!

!

Hbuf(*) Real buffer containing data header

!

!

Fbuf(+) Real buffer containing log res data

!

!

Oct-buf(+) Buffer with synthesized

1/3

act data

1

...........................................................

!

INTEGER

I ,N-point

s

,Header-len ,Pt-dec

,N-f

ac

t

,Flag

t

=32

!+-

NUMBER OF LINES IN

1/3

N-f ac

ALLOCATE Trans(-N-fact:N-fact)

!

OCT FILTER

!

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

3

HeaderPlen=66

GOSUB Get-data

Gets data from the HP3562A

PRINT "GOT DATA"

GOSUB Get-pwr

Reads total power using markers

GOSUB Oct-1-3

Calculates 1/3d Octave Spec

GOSUB Restore-dat

Restores data to Analyzer

LOCAL

@I0

GOT0 W-loop

620 Getgwr:

!

!Reads power using power marker

E30 OUTPUT @Io;"XOFF;PWR;RSMO"

646 ENTER @Io;Pwr-a ,Pwr-b

650 RETURN

660 Get-data: !Reads data block

ASSIGN @ID TO 720

ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT ON

REMOTE 720

OUTPUT @Io;"COMEn

OUTPUT @Io;"DDANU

PRINT "DUMP DATA"

ENTER @I0 USING "#,2A,W";fi$,Data_len

ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT OFF

ALLOCATE REAL Hbuf(1:Header-len)

(

+

)

ENTER @Io;Hbuf

CALL Fshape(Trans(*),N-fact) !Calculates l/3d Oct fllter

!

!

EXTRACT HEADER INFORMATION

m

900

910

920

936

940

950

960

!

970 Oct-1-3:

!

Refomats data in 1/3 Octaves

980 FOR 1=1 TO N-points STEP

8

990 Oct-buf (I )=0

1000

FOR J=-(N-fact-1

)

TO (N-fact-1

)

101

0

IF (I-J)<1 OR (I-J))N-points THEN

IF

(1-J)<1 THEN Oct-dum=Fbuf(l

)

1020

1030 IF

(

I-J

)>N-points THEN Oct-dum=Fbuf (N-points

)

1040

ELSE

!

N_points=Hbuf(2

)

Cmplx-f lg=Hbuf (37

)

Log-data=Hbuf

(

41

)

IF Log-data=@ THEN GOT0 Fmt-error !Data not log res

Amp-units=Hbuf(

10)

IF Amp-units<)l THEN GOT0 Fmt-error !Units not Ult"2

Hbuf(

10

)=0.

)

Start-f=Hbuf (66

Pt-dec=l /Hbuf(56

)

!

pts per decade

el=t--="FJPt-ciec

!

ln decades

ALLOCATE Fbuf(1:N-points)

ALLOCATE Oct-buf(1:N-points)

ENTER @Io;Fbuf

(+

)

ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT ON

PRINT "DATA TRANSFER COMPLETE"

RETCRN

--

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

3

1050 Oct-dum=Fbuf

(

I-J

)

1060 END IF

1670

)=Oct-dum+Trans( J j+Oct-buf(

I

)

Oct-buf

(

I

1080 NEXT J

1098 Oct-dum=Oct-buf

(

I

1 1

60 FOR J=-3 TO

4

11

I0 IF (I+J )>=l AND (I+J )<=N-points THEN

)=SQR(Oct-durn) 1120 Oct-buf

(

I+J

1

l3@

END IF

1140 NEXT

J

1

150 NEXT

I

1160

!

1170 PRINT

"

Total Power

i:s

=

";Pwr-a;" dB

"

1180 RETURN

1190

!

1200 Restore-dat:

!

1218 PRINT "RE-STORING DftTA"

1220 OUTPUT @IoiULDAN"

1230 OUTPUT @Io USING "#,2A,WM;"#A",Data-len

1240 ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT OFF

1250 OUTPUT @Io;Hbuf

(*

);Oct-buf (+);END

1260 RETURN

1278

!

1280 W-loop:!

1290 LOCAL @Io

1300 STOP

1310 Fmt-error:

!

1320 BEEP

1330 PRINT "DATA NOT IN PROPER MEAS MODE FOR"

134 PRINT "1/3rd OCTAVE. MEASUREMENT MUST

"

1350 PRINT ".BE MADE IN LOG RESOLUTION MODE

"

1360 PRINT "AND IN AMP UNITS OF VLT"2

1370 CLEAR @Io

t

1408 SUB Fs

hape(

Trans(

*

,

INTEGER N-f act

)

!

!

SUB PROGRAM TO CALCULATE THE

!

FILTER SHAPE OF

A

li3 RD OCT

!

CLASS

111

FILTER

!

INTEGER

N

FOR N=-N-fact TO N-fact

IF

N(=4 HND N>=-4 THEN

Ntten=l

ELSE

At

ten=( 8/13+2568+( 10"( N/8O

)-I

BB"( -NiS@

j

)"6

)

END IF

/At

ten Transi N )=l

NEXT N

SUBEND

.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

4

!

APPENDIX C

-

EXAMPLE PROGRAM

4

...........................................................

!

!

DEMO PROGRAM DUMP COORDINATE TRANSFORM

BLOCK

!

!

(c)

COPYRIGHT 1985, Hewlett-Packard Co.

!

last update 3-14-85

!

BASIC

3.0

!

!

!

PURPOSE:

!

!

This program will read coord transform block from

!

HP3562A analyzer over the HP-IB bus using

!

the capability of the Series 200.

!

The data is assumed

to

be dB magnitude data and

!

Hz frequency domain power spectrum data.

!

The data is repeatedly read and displayed in a

!

spectral map format. Only the data actual displayed

!

is read and plotted.

!

!

DATA DICTIONARY:

!

!

!

Header-len Data header length (constant)

!

!

Chead-len Coordinate transform header length

!

!

Data-len Data buffer length (bytes)

!

!

N-points Number of data points

!

Cbuf(*) Real buffer for coord transform header

!

!

!

Hbuf(*) Real buffer containing data header

!

Buff(*) Real buffer containing coord trans data

!

!

Mask,(*) Data buffer containing max values; used

!

for hidden line calculations

!

!

Pent(

*

)

Pen control buffer for hidden lines

!

...........................................................

!

INTEGER I ,Real ,Imag ,Mag ,Phase ,Done-f lg

DIM

A$[3l

Real=

1

Imag=2

!

Headgr_len=66

Chead_len=50

Done-flg=0

!

Data header length

!

Coord trans-form header length

!

Measurement done flag

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

Appendix C-Example

4

550 ASSIGN @Io TO 720

560

REMOTE @Io

570 ALLOCATE REAL

Hbuf(1:Header-len),Cbuf(l:Chead-len)

580 Control:

!

590 N-spect =25

600 GOSUB Dsa-setup

610

GOSUB

Get-head

620 GOSUB Plot-init

630 GOSUB Hpib-init

640

FOR K=O TO N-spect-1

650

!

660

!

Wait for End of Measurement

670 W-data:IF Done-flg=0 THEN GOT0 W-data

680

!

6

90

GOSUB Get-data

700

GOSUB Meas-start

710 GOSUB Plot-out

720 NEXT

K

730 LOCAL @Io

740

W-1oop:GOTO W-loop

!

Wait (suppress softkey menu)

750

!

760 Get-data:

!

Gets data and calculates hidden lines

770

GOSUB Mask-update

780 OUTPUT @Io;"DCANn !Dump Coord trans Ansi

790

ENTER @Io USING "#,2A,W";A$,Data_len

00

ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT OFF

810 ENTER @Io;Cbuf(*);Hbuf(*)

(

*

)

820 ENTER @Io; Buf f

830 ASSIGN @Io;FORMAT ON

840 FOR I=0 TO N-points-1

!

Set clipping boundary

I

)

860

IF Buff

(

I )>Y-maxl THEN Buff

(

I )=Y-maxl

870

NEXT

I

880

!

918 FOR 1=0 TO N-points-1

Pent(

I

)=SGN(Penc(

I)

)

920

930

NEXT I

940 Done-f lg=l

950 RETURN

960

!

970 Mask-update:

!

Does

X

&

Y

axis shifting and mask update

980 FOR I=N-points-N-delta-x TO N-points-1

9

90 Mask( I )=CY-min-Delta-y)

1000 NEXT

I

1010 Xshift:FOR I=N-delta-x TO N-points-1

(

I

)=Buff

(

I )+el

t

a-y

Buff

1020

1030

Mask(I-N-delta-x)=MAX(Mask(I)-Uelta_y,Buff(I))

1048 NEXT I

1050 RETURN

!

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE |

发布评论

评论列表 (0)

  1. 暂无评论